Home

Operation Manual - Bosch Security Systems

1. Panel Admin Panel 3 Card Readers Reader 1 Descriptian Main Entrance iet Reader Options ert O Settings ey PIN Code Settings pp Anti Passback et Dual Card OPB Settings Configuration e Entry Reader C Exit Reader works with C Entry and Arm Disarm Tg Reader for C Elevator Reader b Es This section allows user to define the use of the Reader either an Entry Reader an Exit Reader an Entry and Arm Disarm Reader or an Elevator Reader By default all 16 Readers are set as Entry Reader A screen of the Reader Function page is shown above Entry Reader This is the default setting All 16 readers are configured as Entry Reader allowing Door Access If an Entry Reader is defined to work with an Exit Reader the Reader Function for the Entry Reader will change to reflect the status A sample is shown in the screenshot below The Exit Reader s description becomes a hyperlink User can click on it to re configure the Exit Reader Panel Admin Panel 3 Card Readers Reader 4 Description Production Dept Entry Reader Reader Options Rio Settings PIN Code Settings Anti Passback Oual Card APB Settings Configuration Entry and Arm Disarm Reader works with Pr ion xit R 208 Exit Reader When this mode is selected this Reader will operate as an Exit Reader User has to define the Entry Reader that this Exit Reader has to work with This Exit Reader will follow the operational behavio
2. Monitors t Sound amp SimpleSound MER Mouse Stickies Numbers POFWriter Shortcut QuickTime Settings Remote Access Speech Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller APPENDIX F Initial Setup To Access Easy Controller en 269 3 Enter the P Address and the Subnet mask as shown below This will be the Macintosh s IP Address for this initial set up TCP IP ADC Office Connect wia Ethernet Setup Configure Manually IF Address 129 2 0 40 Subnet mask z55 295 L0 Router address Search domains Marne serwer addr 4 Click on the Save button when prompted This message will appear when you attempt to close the dialog box save changes to the current configuration Saving the changes may interrupt any TCP IP services currently established Don t Save Cancel Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 270 en APPENDIX F Initial Setup To Access Easy Controller ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 33 3 Setting to be made to the Web browser 33 3 1 For PC User Follow the procedure to set up the Web browser options 1 From the Windows Control Panel click on the Intemet Options icon The Internet Options dialog box appears Internet Properties General Security Content Connections Programs Advanced Home page A You can change which page to use for your home page Addr
3. 2 Select the desired Reader from the Reader Description list box If no reader is selected the report generated will include all the available readers in the selected panel In this example all the readers in Panel 3 will be included in the report 3 Click on the button for a print preview of the report The following screen capture shows an example of the report for the Main Entrance Return To Card Readers Return To Selection Criteria Bosch Security Systems Pte Ltd 38C Jalan Peninpin Singapore 577180 Card Reader Report Monday J0 Aug O04 15 46 08 Reader H 1 Description Hain Entrance Reader Pumcki Entry Reader Reader Op bogus Turn off the reader Nan Selected Enable Keypad Only Operation Hot Selected On Holidays follow holiday schedules to work in conjunction with Card Functionality Selected Keypad Timeout i 5 seconds Enable reader lockout Not Selected Scheduiing Options Sehedules will nor be used ta unlock chis door Only after a valid access condition Not Selected Root Cebpark Sekbings Door Open Taner 60 seconds Door Strike Timer seconds Door Strike ucpurc L Deor Input Settings BRecnioezt to Exit Davice Input 1 4 Ifyou wish to view other Reader s configuration click on the Return To Selection Criteri ink and reselect If you are satisfied with the configuration and wish to print out a hardcopy click on the Print button located on the Toolbar of the web browser program Al
4. 2 Lee Weng 0 1 henhi 25 25 LIT 1 1 5 2 Koh Buck 0 1 hex dO E 255 1 1 1 T 2 Bryan Lee 1 hexireDOOr 25 255 1 1 1 B Oo 2 Low Robert 1 hex TODODI 5 xh 1 1 1 a 2 S Kumara D 1 hex 130001 25 255 1 1 1 10 2 Mark Richi o 1 hemi 50001 25 255 1 1 1 1 o 2 Aziz AIh 0 1 hew 16000 2 255 1 1 1 12 2 Loretta Lea 0 1 hex 18000i 25 255 1 1 1 13 2Dadi 1 hex aDODI m5 25 1 1 1 id 2 Marcus Be 0 1 hex cDODI 25 255 LII 1 1 15 Oo 2 Vernon Ter Oo 1 hea 0000 25 25h 1 1 1 15 2 Piere Bros 1 hengia 25 zh 1 1 1 The file above is only an example of how the CSV file looks like There are more fields than shown in the example above For each of the field in the file saved refer to the table below The following details are saved in the database Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Card Assignment en 53 Card Number Limited to a length of 14 digits consisting of O 9 Facility Code The range of numbers for this code is dependent on the Card format used up to a maximum of 5 digits For example Standard 26 bit wiegand format could have a range from O to 255 Can be BOSCH ADC Proprietary Card Format Standard 26 bit For mat or any other format configurable up to a total of 16 types of card formats including the above 2 mentioned format 2 in the Card Format Card Format column in the exported CSV file represents the second listed card
5. Access Easy Controller ID Alarm Priority 2 indicates that Door Held Open has priority 2 under alarm transactions 1 has the highest priority followed by 2 and so on NOTICE The transactions are sorted by the alarm priority and date time Alarms having the highest pri ority are shown on the top of the list Those alarms having the same priority will be sorted again by the date time Hence the newest and highest priority alarm will always be shown on the top of the list Please refer to Chapter 12 Server Setup Alarm Event Setup Alarm Priority Setup for more details Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 24 en Activity Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller These are some of the view activity menu items explained in brief To display only Alarm transactions To display Valid and Alarm transactions To display Restored and Alarm transactions To display All transactions To display only Time Clocking transactions To acknowledge Alarm transactions This will silence the audible tones on the Access Easy For Master This will enable the audible tones on Access Easy For Master To select a Access Easy Controller for which the user wants to view the activity only We can view the activity for all the control lers or for selected controllers This list box will not be available in the Alarm View Login to Access Easy Master and the View Activity screen will
6. Exit Reader 4 Zone 3 Department Iam Entrance Entry Reader 3 Zone 2 APB Zone 2 am Exit Reader 2 Zone 2 Office Wain Entrance Entry Reader 1 Zone 1 APB Zone 1 Any Reader assigned to operate Soft APB mode or Full APB mode will be given an Entry Zone and Exit Zone When a cardholder presents card at Entry Reader 1 the system will verify whether he has been registered in Zone 1 If he has been registered in Zone 1 access is granted to him When he opens the door to gain access such that the door contact sensing is opened he is registered to be in Zone 2 However if he is verified to be in other zones instead of Zone 1 access will be denied to him NOTICE In the case that he is verified to be in Zone 1 and is granted access but he did not open the door to gain access he will not be registered in Zone 2 He will only be registered in Zone 2 when he is granted access and opens the door to gain access Using this verification method no card can bypass any zone to gain access to any other zone In addition zone will only be registered into the card if the user has opened the door physi cally based on door contact sensing For the above example assume that the mode Activate Full APB violations will be denied access is selected For Entry Reader 1 the Entry Zone will be selected as Zone 1 and Exit Zone selected as Zone 2 as shown below C APB deactivated Activate Time Based APB Timer setting for Ti
7. Fis and Priser Sharing RAFTS Ee pesos ei O Renge Aassinnce C Remote Desktop E Skype CO UPnP Famer C Ee Display a potifiostion when Windows Freeell blocks a peogcem Enter the following data Name NTP Port number 123 Add a Port Use these settings to open a port through Windows Firewall To find the port number and protocol consult the documentation for the program or service you want to use Name 123 Click OK to save the settings Software Manual ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller APPENDIX F Initial Setup To Access Easy Controller en 263 33 APPENDIX F Initial Setup To Access Easy Controller Before connection is made to Access Easy for Master there are few conditions that must be taken into consideration They are 1 Ifthe Central Monitoring Computer CMC is not connected to a Network as in a stand alone 2 If the CMC is connected to a Network For case 1 having the CMC as a stand alone unit either IP Address for the for Master or CMC can be changed to suit the other For an initial set up a Notebook or a Personal Computer either stand alone or taken from an existing network have to be used For either case there must be a 10Base T Ethernet card installed and with a running web browser program such as Internet Explorer version 4 0 and above or Netscape Navigator version 4 0 and above Connect the Access Easy
8. In the Card Assignment you are allowed to add a batch of cards all in a single process This is extremely useful when a large group of cardholders is to be entered into the system at the shortest period of time The following steps guide you how to perform this operation Let us take an example presuming you need to add a batch of cards with the number ranging from 8001 to 8100 1 Click on the Ih icon for Batch Cards on the Card Assignment screen The screen on the following page shows the default settings when Batch Cards is selected Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Card Assignment en 49 Card x anui Facility Code 0 Card Format BOSCH A DC Proprietary Format Access Level Please select an Access Level Details Number Of Cards 100 Add Options Copy From Global Card x Facility Code 0 Card Format BOSCH ADC Proprietary Format v Automatically replace existing card s with default reference card information 2 Enter the starting card ID in the Card field the number specified here will be the start ing number of the batch card operation and will be included In this example enter 8001 3 The number that appears in the Facility Code is configured in Server Setup Default Set tings If the code is different from the default then change it Enter O if the Card Format doesn t support Facility Code 4 Select the appropriate Card Format from the list The c
9. None This setting will disable the Output channel NOTICE Address for Door Strike is selectable only to within the Card s spare Output channels Door Forced Alarm Output Door Held Alarm Output and Invalid Card Output is selectable only within the user programmable 32 outputs Door Input Settings For Entry Reader Entry and Arm Disarm Reader A screen of the Door Input Settings page is shown in the section Door Output Settings The Access Easy Controller has the capability to support a maximum of 16 wiegand card read ers 64 input I monitoring points and 64 relay output O points Of the 64 I Os only 32 Inputs and Outputs are user programmable the other 32 I Os are assigned to the Readers The addresses for Input devices Request to Exit device and Door Contact connected in rela tion to the Reader are pre defined and cannot be changed The following is the list of hard ware to configure Request to Exit Device Door Contact Door Forced Open Alarm delay duration vvvv Pre alarm Warning before door held open alarm Request to Exit Device To allocate an Input Address for Request to Exit Device select Input else select None The Address for Request to Exit Device is fixed and cannot be changed Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 136 en Panels Admin ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Door Contact To allocate an Input Address for Door Contact select Input for Source else select N
10. You will be led to a screen as shown below Change the connection settings to PPP TEP IP webcast Connect wia Setup Configure IF Address Subnet mask Router address Marne serwer addr Using PPP Serwer P will be supplied by serwer gt will be supplied by server gt will be supplied by server gt Search domains Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Dial in User en 239 5 Next select Remote Access from the Control Panels sub menu Monitors tr sound MOUSE Numbers POFWriter Shortcut QuicklTime Settings Remote Access Speech Startup Disk TEP IP ww 6 You will be led to a screen as shown in the following Enter the user name and password for the Access Easy for Master which you want to connect to Also enter the dial in num ber in the Number box Click on Connect button to remotely access the Access Easy for zZ D T et D S Remote Access webcast1 H E e Registered User e Guest bd Save password Number 2 425146 7 After successfully connecting to Access Easy for Master remotely you may log on to Access Easy for Master from any browser by supplying the IP address for the Access Easy for Master and the correct Access Easy for Master user name and password NOTICE Do NOT enter the Dial In User Name and Password it should be the normal login User ID and Password th
11. 1 Email SHS Configuration 7 GSH Modem Connected ie Yes C No Remate Panel Address IF A ES AEC Panel Ha i 0 U 1 Z a 8 U8 i U H alU 4 8 5 U H O 0 0 j B 1 0 7 D 0 8 j U B D 0 j B 1 10 9 o j 0 j O0 f0 10 C EE _ 2 Select the No radio button for GSM Modem Connected and click on the button The screen as shown below appears 16 232 255 191 GSM Modem Connected i Yes No me nne x al z EN i r1 T oe 3 Since this is a SMS Client user will have to delete the default IP address in the SMS Server IP field and enter the IP Address of the SMS Server 4 Click on the 999 button 5 You will need to reboot the Access Easy Controller for the changes to take effect SMS Server IP NOTICE As there is only one available Serial com port in the CPU only either the GSM adapter or the Analogue Dial up modem can be connected to the Access Easy Controller hence dial up fea tures will not be enabled when SMS server is to be configured like wise to the SMS server when Dial up is been setup By default the Dial up feature is enabled and the SMS feature is disabled Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 180 en Panels Admin 16 9 16 9 1 Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Reset APB The Reset APB is the final menu item of the Manual Control
12. Date Time Selection In order to successfully generate a report you will need to specify the criteria for the Access Easy Master The following is a table which will explain the purpose and usage of each Selec tion Date Time Selec Date is a compulsory selection User needs to identify what is the range tion of date the report should cover The activities that occur within these dates will be listed in the report Time however is an optional selection User could specify the time period of interest that the activities have occurred The activities that occur during this period of time will be listed in the report Devices Selection This is an optional selection It lists devices such as Reader and I O Point to choose The activities that are generated by the selected list of Devices will be listed in the report Card Holders This is an optional selection Specific Card Holder can be chosen The Selection activities that are generated by the selected list of Card Holders will be listed in the report Events Selection This is an optional selection User could specify the type of activities to be included in the report By creating a combination of all the selections the user would print a summary of the required report in the shortest time Let us look into an example as we go through the steps of configuring the criteria We would like to print out all the Door Forced Open Alarm Event that occur to R amp D Main
13. Input Point Report Aorday 30 Augy 200d 26 28 di Input H 1 Description Notion Deteccor 1l fam Belay 3 seconds Blam Belay 3 seconds Zone Alarm Zone 1 Input Arm Disarm Comtrol urm Disarm Criteria l Toggle UOnutput Link Alarm Status Notion Detector 1 Simulators Arn Disarm Status Not Assigned Ready Status Not Assigned Bypass ftatus Noc Assigned If you wish to print out a hardcopy click on the Print button located on the Toolbar of the web browser program Alternatively click on the File and select Print i e 4 To return to the Input Setup web page click on the S212 Input Point Setup ink 5 To generate a preview of other input points click on the Return To Selection Criteria ink Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 150 en Panels Admin 16 5 Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Output Setup The Access Easy Controller has 32 user programmable Output Points that will be used for Util ity Triggering purposes The addresses for these Input Points range from 33 to 64 and are available on the I O Card Each card can provide up to 8 Output Points The Output Points are triggered manually by user via the web page or based on Schedule Intervals or be triggered by an Input Point as a Status indicator Please refer to section on Input Setup for detail The status of all the Output Points is displayed in the Output Control web page except those
14. Panel Admin Panel 3 Input Point Setup Input 4 1 Description Hot ion Detector 1 Arm Delay lo seconds 0 255 Alarm Delay D seconds 0 255 Army oe Undefined Disarm Army Disarm Hot Assigned k i Alarm Zone 1 z zone Alarm Status Not Assigned F Status Ready Not Azsigned Not assigned tus Delete the default text in the Description field and enter the new Description Delete the default entry for Arm Delay and enter the new Arm Delay this field is a hyper link to the first Input Point if this is the second or subsequent Input Point of an Alarm Zone If you want immediate Arming Disarming leave it as O Value from 1 to 255 will cause a delay before the Alarm Zone is armed During this delay any triggering of the Input Points will not be considered as an Alarm Delete the default entry for Alarm Delay and enter the new Alarm Delay this field is a hyperlink to the first Input Point if this is the second or subsequent Input Point of an Alarm Zone If you want the Alarm to be activated immediately when the Input Point is triggered during Arm condition leave it as O Value from 1 to 255 will cause a delay before Alarm activation During this delay period if the Input Point restored to normal or user Disarm the Alarm Zone no alarm will be activated Alarm activation will cause the Output Relay configured in the Alarm Status to turn on NOTICE The Alarm status Outp
15. en 175 Email Configuration Devices Group 2 Description Human Resources C All Readers Inputs amp Output Points C All Readers Only C All Input Points Only All Output Points Only NC m Select either one v Selected Devices Only C Omit these Selected Devices Only Mothing ta appear Inside wind ow List of Selected Device Select a Device Main Entrance J Cardholders Group 1 Description SalesTeam Group 1 Select either one C All cardholders Selected cardholders only C Omit these selected cardholders only Nothing ta appear List of Selected Cardholders Inside window Search Option Name Events Group 2 Description Human Resources Don t care for Lateness Report Attached Message Alarm lll hd C All Events f Selected Events Only C Omit these Selected Events Only Select either one Mothing to appear List of Selected Events inside wind ow Select an Event Panel Tamper Send To L Message Covices Cardholders e Events Lateness Report For email only Group 1 Description 5ystem Admin Group 1 Attendance Cut Off Time Ho ur 9 x Minute 0 x Day of week to send report Sun W Mon FF Tue F Wed F Thu vFn F Sat f All cardholders C Selected cardholders only C Omit these selected cardholders only Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 176 en Panels Admin 16 8 7 V
16. j 5ymeonLog B Tapia Tepig 2g tga Lj Ins e TOPAZUSB ddd s 7 Tick LJ udis Tj uhcd J utrabb Iw Update i UPS f usbhuh EE usbecan USBSTOR ZI Uter Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller APPENDIX E Setting up a Timeserver en 253 4 Right click LocalNTP and select Modify Hegsiy Edt View Favortes Help a sysauda a Name Tse BDaa UN aB efendt REG Sz value not set H Tagisiv aom REG DwORD OxM0000001 1 i ig ab Per MSIL REG SZ SpecialSkew rx ab lumi i Gy ThiSvr 3b tym Delete REG Sz NISDS 3 E TOPAZUSB dad mg Tikwks 5 Enter 1 for Value data and click OK Edit DWORD Value Value name LocaNTF Value data Base f Hexadecimal C Decimal Cancel 6 Right click ReliableTimeSource and select Modify Data Default HEG 5zZ value nat set 8 LocalNTP REG_DWORD OxO0000001 1 Period REG_SZ SpecialSkew type REG 5Z MSDS i FEG_DWORD Ox00000000 0 EIL MM Delete Hename 7 Enter 1 for Value data and click OK Edit DWORD Value Value name Reliable TimeSource Value data Base i Hexadecimal C Decimal Cancel NOTICE If HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SYSTEM CURRENTCONTROLSET SERVICES WS32TIME PARAME TERS doesn t contain the ReliableTimeSource settings user will have to create one Follow steps 8 9 otherwise proceed to step 10 Robert Bosch SEA
17. v Lise a proxy server Address 123 2 0 86 Fort jen Advanced Iv Bypass proxy server for local addresses 6 Click on the Advanced button The Proxy Settings dialog box appears Proxy Settings FI Servers Type Proxy address to use Fort B HTP 82086 o Secure 123 2 0 85 so ER pans Eb Gopher 3208 j sa Socks MENS Ly w Use the same proxy server for all protocols Exceptions m Do not use proxy server for addresses beginning with dB 123 Use semicolons to separate entries 7 As shown in the above the Proxy address used is 129 2 0 86 this is IP address of the Proxy Server in this example it will differ in your own office Port setting is also depen dent on your office network setup However if this PC you are configuring has always been able to access the internet before you will need only to enter the IP address of your Access Easy Master Including a like the above means to bypass the Proxy Server for all IP address starting with the 129 address 8 Since the default IP addresses for the Access Easy Master and the Access Easy Control lers are 129 x x x you may directly access the Access Easy Master and the Access Easy Controllers without going through a proxy Server Now that the browser and IP addresses have been configured we will now be able to view the Access Easy Master and the Access Easy Controllers through our web browser Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Sof
18. 14 15 16 17 Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Once you have connected to the GMS Modem you shouldn t change the baudrate Type AT PR 19200 and press the Enter key You should get an OK reply Now you will need to change your baudrate of the HyperTerminal to 19200 Click this icon 3 to disconnect the connection Click on the icon ET to change the Baudrate to 19200 and then click on the icon 2 to reconnect with the GSM modem again Type AT and follows by a return if the GSM modem replies you OK then the configu ration is complete You will need to save the configuration into the non volatile memory in the GSM modem Type AT amp W and follows by a return the GSM modem will reply you OK Reboot the GSM modem and try connecting again to the GMS modem using the baudrate 19200 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller APPENDIX Glen 281 34 2 How to test the GSM modem You could test whether the GSM modem is working before connecting it to the AEC 1 Firstly prepare the GSM Modem as shown above and then connect the GSM Modem to the PC via the serial port and runs HyperTerminal Follows the below steps to send out a test SMS Type AT CMGS xxxxxxxx follows by a return you will expect to see a gt reply from the GSM Modem xxxxxxxxx denote the mobile number 2 Next type the message TESTING TESTING follows by Ctrl Z follows by a return you will expe
19. 2012 10 244 en APPENDIX A Selecting Events Devices and Cardholders for Reports ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 28 APPENDIX A Selecting Events Devices and Cardhold ers for Reports Selected Omit Readers Selected Omit Input Selected Omit Output Y iud a c o A E Q o 2 E T c Vv iz o Oo Q cc lt All Input Points All Output Points Selected Omit Cardholders Panel Tamper Panel AC Failure Power Restored Door Forced Open Door Held Open Door Closed Duress Access Denied Passback Exit Denied Passback 3 gt XE 5 O O S 8 3 D TD N T2 3 3 I O F D D D N JJ 5 5 ct D O o D D a o Oo Q l Q D 4 Q 3 D Q gt U UJ PIN Invalid Schedule Invalid Card Invalid start Date Invalid End Date Disarmed Armed By schedule Disarmed By Schedule Bypassed Access Granted Exit Granted Access Granted Soft PB Exit Granted Soft APB PIN Changed I m D o gt All Cardholders x x x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt gt O O D o o U D D Q O 2 ga Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller APPENDIX A Selecting Events Devices and Cardholders for Reports en 245 Door Access Enabled ox x Door Access Disabled EAE Door Locked D
20. Al The screen will refresh and show All the activities Panels 411 F B Alarm B Valid B Restore amp all Time Attendance View fctivity All Activities THme ard No 13Jul 2004 Side Entrance Access Granted 12 34 07 18 Denezel Washington 13 Jul 2004 Main Entrance Access Granted 12 33 58 17 Sadique 13Jul 2004 Production Dept Entry Reader Access Granted 12 33 40 16 Gurmit Singh 13 Jul 2004 R amp D Dept Entry Reader Access Denied Lg wed 15 James Cameroon 13 Jul 2004 Main Entrance Door Held Open L2 33 30 15 Bastigula 135 Jul 2004 Side Entrance Access Granted l2r133 22 14 Pete Sampras 13 Jul 2004 Main Entrance Access Granted izyis 13 Bastiqula 13Jul 2004 Praductian Dept Entry Reader Access Granted 12 33 04 12 William Sim 13 Jul 2004 R amp D Dept Entry Reader Access Denied Learg 11 Bill Clinton 1 13 Jul 2004 Main Entrance Door Held Open 12 32 54 3 Dean Jones Mo 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 26 en Activity 4 1 2 Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 5 To show Time Attendance activities click Q Time Attendance The screen will refresh and show the Time Attendance activities Panels A11 x alarm B valid Restore All Time Attendance E m View Activity Time Attendance SS E a A ET 1 iz Jul 2004 Production Dept Entry Reader Clock Gut 14 42 45 16 Gurmit Singh 1 Jul 004 R amp D D
21. C Selected Readers and I 0 Points available Readers available I 0 Points zi List of selected Readers and I O Points MAX 50 ODE 5 Choose the appropriate option button Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Report Generation en 109 All Readers and I O All activities of devices such as Readers Input Points and Output Points All Readers Only activities of Readers will be taken into account in the generation of report Selection of this option will result in only Readers activities to be included in the report All I O Points Only activities of Input Points and Output Points will be taken into account in the generation of report Selecting this option will result in only I O Points activities to be included in the report Selected Readers Only selected devices activities listed in the List of selected Readers and I O Points and I O Points will be taken into account in the generation of report In this example choose Selected Readers and I O Points as we only want Door Force Open Alarms from R amp D Main Entrance to be included in the report as shown below 6 Check the Devices check box to indicate that Devices selection is to be included in the cri teria as shown below NOTICE The selected Device will not be taken into consideration during the generation of the report if the check box for Devices is not selected Devices All Readers
22. Central Office Sone EB Panel Name Central Office Alarm Zone 1 a E i Motion Gebector 1 Disarmed Low 2 Motion Detector 2 Disarmad Low Alarm Zone Z i x 3 Motion Detector 3 _ Disanmned Low 4 Motion Detector 4 Disarmad Low 5 Motion Detector 5 Disarmed Low No Change C Arm Now 6 Undefined Input Point 6 Disarmed Low No Change C rm Now 7 Undefined Input Point 7 Disarmed Low Mo Change C Arm Now 8 Undefined Input Point 8 Disarmed Low No Change C Arm Now 9 Undefined Input Point 9 Disarmad Low No Change C Arm Now 10 Undefined Input Point 10 Disarmed Low No Change C Arm Now 11 Undefined Input Point 11 Disarmed Low No Change C Arm Now 12 Undefined Input Point 12 Disarmed Low No Change C Arm Now 13 Undefined Input Paint 13 Disarmed Low No Change C rm Now 14 Undefined Input Point 14 Disarmed Low Mo Change C Arm Now 15 Undefined Input Point 15 Disarmed Low Wo Change Arm Now 16 Undefined Input Point 16 Dizarmed Low No Change C Arm Now 1 Select the desired radio button see NOTICE below 2 Click on the button to send the command The web page will refresh to reflect the new status NOTICE If the current status of the Input Point is Armed the Manual Actions will show Disarm Now Which means you could send a disarm command to this input when the 3 button is click Likewise if the Input Point is currently Disarmed the Manual Actions will show Arm Now How to Arm an Al
23. Entrance Door Device from 24 Feb 2003 to 18 April 2003 Date between 8am to 5pm Time Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 108 en Report Generation ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 2 First of all select the From date and the To date from the Date Time entry Date Time Month Year Day Month Year D aw From 24 Feb x 2003 To 18 Apr 2003 3 Next select the From time and the To time and check the check box for Include Time in Processing User also has to select whether the time is Continuous or according to Timespan by selecting the appropriate radio button Continuous means that the report generated would be all the way from the starting time of the starting date to the end time of the ending date Timespan means that the report will be generated from the starting time to the ending time for each day in the selected date range Include Time in Processing C Continuous e Timespan Hour Minute Second Hour Minute Second From 8 zj 30 x o To 17 30 o zl NOTICE If the check box for Include Time in Processing is not selected the report will be generated according to the other selected criteria without any time filtering 4 To configure the Devices selection click on the Devices hyperlink and the following screen will appear Activity Report Generation Load Criteria Audit i Devices f All Readers and 1 0 Points C All Readers C AIL I O Points
24. LocalS ystem LocalSystem LocalS ystem LocalSystem LocalS ystem Locals ystem LocalSystem LocalS ystem LocalSystem LocalS ystem LocalSystem Locals ystem Lac alSus tem LocalSystem LocalS ystem LocalSystem Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 256 en APPENDIX E Setting up a Timeserver ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 14 Select Automatic from the Startup Type drop down list and click Start indews Time Properties Local Computer 16 Reboot PC 32 2 For Windows XP Professional 1 Click s Start Start button and select Run button 2 Type regedit in the window Type the name of a program Folder document or Internet resource and Windows will open it For vau Cancel Browse Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller APPENDIX E Setting up a Timeserver en 257 3 Select HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SYSTEM CURRENTCONTROLSET SERVICES WS32TIME TIMEPROVIDERS NTPSERVER 4 Right click Enabled and select Modify Mame Tvpe Data ab Default REG 57 Pvalue nat set S AllowNonstandar 4 REG DWORD OxO0000001 1 CWIMDOWSIsvstem3zyw3zkime dll ny OxOOO00001 13 OxOO000000 m3 Delete Rename 5 Enter 1 for Value data and click OK Edit DWORD Value Value name Enabled Value data Base Decimal 6 Select HKEY LOCAL_MACHINE SYSTEM CURRENTCONTROLSET SERVICES W32T
25. Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller APPENDIX F Initial Setup To Access Easy Controller en 275 Enter default URL Address for Access Easy for Master Zl Cannot find server Microsoft Internet Explorer 2 90 B Ala mad Fonverd Stop Refresh Home Search Favorites Hist 25 NOTICE BH The page cannot be displayed The page you are looking for is currently unavailable The Web site might be experiencing technical difficulties or you may need to adjust your browser settings Please try the following Press the Enter key or click on the Qo button This should bring you to the Access Easy for Master User Login page Proceed with the Login see the following NOTICE If the Access Easy Controller is connected to the Central Monitoring Computer via a hub as in a Network configuration the UTP Cat 5 cable connecting the Access Easy Controller and the hub must be polarised accordingly as shown on the following drawing Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd RJ45 Plug Cable Colour RJ45 Plug Pin standard Pin One to One Hook facing down ite Orange 1 Wand 4 YATTON y E Bown O Software Manual Hook facing down Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 276 en APPENDIX F Initial Setup To Access Easy Controller ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 33 5 Setting the Access Easy Controller IP Address Through Address Resolution Protocol ARP An address is a set of unique numbers
26. Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 254 en APPENDIX E Setting up a Timeserver Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 8 9 ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Right click on a empty space in the right panel and select New DWORD Value Mame Type Data Default HER Sz value not set RS LocalNTP HEG D VvURD OxOO000001 1 Pernod HEB 5z Specials kev lab type REG SZ Mt5D5 FEG_DWORD OxOO000001 1 Mew k Key String value Binary Value DWORD Value Key in ReliableTimeSource Mame Type Data Default REG 52 value not set RY LocalNTP REG Dv HD OxOO000001 1 ab Period HER 5S Specials kev type REG Sz HDS ig ReliableTimeSource REG DA RD Ox00000000 0 10 Click Astart Start button and select Settings Control Panel z ALL for Broadband Netscape 7 1 New Office Document Open Office Document Windows Update Wire ip Set Program Access and Defaults Programs k Documents STER 3 Control Panel Search Help uH Taskbar amp Start Menu Hun Shut Down Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller APPENDIX E Setting up a Timeserver en 11 Double click on Administrative Tools icon JS ual ere Add Hemewe Add remove Doknenwifraieee Hordwese Phogenms Took Lipis Fd 4 pe m a o n cues Java Plugi Keyboard Mad tni Dpi Regona Scanner and Scheduled Sounds and Semanbec piam Optics Laamenat Tacks Mulrmedia Lree
27. The LED will be turned EOE n for ie arator ten gar now gee o Guard Tour Alert A LED is normally connected to this output The LED will be turned Ouput on when the Input Duration has lapsed and the key switch which is switched to ON state is still not removed A reminder alarm will be activated The timing diagram below gives a graphical description of the function Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 154 en Panels Admin 16 6 2 Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Guard Tour Input Guard Tour Output Guard Tour Alert Output TT ti t Input Duration In the timing diagram above Guard Tour Input at transition A and B will cause the Guard Tour Output to be turned On for the duration when the Guard Tour Input is triggered When the Input Duration t1 has lapsed and the Guard Tour Input is still at High 1 the Guard Tour Alert Output will be turned On until the Guard Tour Input is switched to Low 0 Whereas for t2 the Input Duration is such that the Guard Tour Input has already been switched to Low 0 before the Input Duration t2 has lapsed Therefore the Guard Tour Alert Output is not trig gered In practical scenario a key switch is normally connected to the Guard Tour Input a LED con nected to Guard Tour Output and a LED and or an alarm is connected to the Guard Tour Alert Output When the guard goes for his daily routine he would turn his key switch
28. is i amp i7 3 Click on any undefined Department or its Description to configure a new department The screen as shown below appears Department 10 Description Undefined Department 10 L 4 Enter a description for the department and click on the button Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Server Setup en 93 12 6 Set Date amp Time The Access Easy Master software allows user to set the date and time of the real time clock within the Server When the date and time is set in the Server the date and time is synchro nized to the Controller User can also choose the Time Zone in which the Server is operating in On the other hand the Controller can have a different Time Zone from the Server if the Con troller is operating in another Time Zone The time from the Server would be synchronized to the Controller accordingly Time setting is in the 24 hour format Click on Set Date amp Time from the menu item list and you will see a screen as shown below NOTICE For the transactions in View Activity transactions from Panel 1 will send the date and time of the activities that have taken place to the Server and the Server will convert the time accord ing to the Server s Time Zone if the operating time zones for the Server and Controller is dif ferent Hour 18 Minute 3 Second 47 Day 26 Month Aug Year 2004 Choose T
29. l id Reader id Linkocked Clased 1g 15 Reader 15 Unlocked Closed Eq 16 Reader 16 Unlocked Closed Menu items are displayed an left pane for ease of operation The menu graups are those in bright yellow background Software Manual Sub menu item link D N Change 3 Unlock C Momentarily Unlock No Change O Unlock Mementarily Unlock No Change Ci Unlock Momentarily Unlock No Change C Unlock C Momentarily Unlock 9 No Change Lock E No Change C Lock 9 No Change C Lock N Change C Lock 9 No Change Lock E Na Change Lock No Change Lock 9 No Change Lock 5 No Change C Lock G No Change C Lock No Change Lack No Change C Lock Momentarily Unlock Momentarily Unlock C Momentanily Unlock M ementarnly Unlock C Momentarily Unlock OQ Momentarily Unlock OQ Mamentarily Unlock Momentarily Unlock Momentarily Unlock C Momentarily Unlack C Momentarily Unlock C Momentarily Unlock Current menu item page on right pane Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Leme ERE SM c En RR EOM MM QM MUN 200 en Door Control ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 19 Door Control The Door Control is one of the menu items of the Manual Control Group It allows user to check the status of all the doors and send a command to either momentarily unlock or perma nently unlock lock the door without having to be at the door location As this is a control operated by a user manually it has
30. to 1 is detected at Request to Exit This causes the Door strike to be driven high for a duration of t1 the Door Strike Duration Section 2 In Section 2 a leading edge is first detected at Lock Unlock Door This causes the Door strike to be driven high for the duration when the Lock Unlock Door is triggered Since the Door Strike is already at state high meaning it is de energised when a leading edge is detected at Request to Exit there is no difference in Door Strike Section 3 In Section 3 a leading edge is detected at Door Contact However there is a Door Forced Open Alarm Delay Duration of period t3 Hence the Door Forced Open is driven high only after the Door Forced Open Alarm Delay Duration has passed and remains high until the Door Con tact is triggered low The Door Forced Open Alarm Delay Duration is to ensure that the alarm is genuine and not caused by noise or interference Section 4 In Section 4 a leading edge is detected at Door Contact However the signal lasts for a period less than the Door Forced Open Alarm Delay Duration of period t3 Therefore the Door Forced Open output is not activated This is because the signal detected could be due to noise or interference One Shot This function is similar to Feed Through except it is used when the output of a function block is triggered for a predefined duration when input state is high This function will enable any type of output such as physical output link or re
31. 15 17 05 Time farmat HH mm zz z Time separator z How to Edit the User Definable Fields 1 2 3 Delete the default text and enter the new description for User Field 1 Repeat for User Field 2 The above example shows that Mobile is used in User Field 1 and E mail is used for User Field 2 mE Click on the button After User Field 1 and User Field 2 are changed user can then see Mobile and E mail instead when user selects Add Card from Card Assignment menu as shown below Card 1 Facility Code t Card Format AEC Priority Format User Name Card Humber 1 Department Access Level Please select an Access Level mic rd Details Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 96 en Server Setup 12 7 2 12 7 3 12 7 4 12 8 Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller How to Edit the Facility Code 1 Delete the default text and enter the new Facility Code you can obtain this code from your card supplier enter O if the Card Format doesn t support Facility Code E 2 Click on the button User can then see the facility code appear as default when user selects Add Card or Batch Card from Card Assignment menu How to Edit the Date Format 1 Select the preferred Date format to be seen in the View Activity page and in all the reports generated 2 Select a Date separator if desired EX 3 Click on the button User can then see a sample of
32. 16 3 8 Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller To set the Schedule 1 If selection is made on PIN code required except during schedule intervals or PIN code required except during regular schedule intervals and holiday schedule intervals the Schedule field must be set 2 To edit the Schedule select the appropriate schedule from the Schedule list box To set the Reader s PIN Code 1 If the selection is made on PIN code only operation using Reader s PIN code the Reader s PIN code 1 7 digits field must be entered 2 To edit the Reader s PIN code delete the default PIN and enter the new Reader s PIN code limited to 7 digits See NOTICE 1 And 2 NOTICE 1 User can enter from 1 to 7 digits for the Reader s PIN code default code 1234000 2 For security reason every character entered for the PIN code is represented by an aster isk For Macintosh user it is represented by a dot instead Anti Passback APB Settings Panel Admin Panel 3 Lard Readers Reader 1 Descriptian Main Entrance FE Reader Function ub Reader Options E I O Settings FE PIN Code Settings ee Dual Card Configuration ite APB deactivated C Activate Time Based APB Timer setting for Time Based APB fo minutes C Activate Soft APB violations will be logged but access exit granted Entry Zone Undef ined z Exit Zone Undef ined t Activate Full APB violations will be denied access Entry Zane Und
33. 2 Security C Check for publisher s certificate revocation J Check for server certificate revocation requires restart L Check for signatures on downloaded program O Do nat save encrypted pages to disk Check the Use SSL 2 0 O Empty Temporary Intemet Files folder when browser is closed and Use SSL 3 0 box A O Warn if changing between secure and not secure mode 7 Wan id forms submittal is being redirected Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 16 en Logging In And Understanding Access Easy Master Main Menu ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 6 Click on OK and go to the menu items of the web browser and select View Refresh The Security Alert box appears on the screen Security Alert Information vou exchange with this site cannot be viewed or changed by others However there is a problem with the site s security certificate ity The security certificate was issued by a company you have not chosen to trust View the certificate to determine whether you want to trust the certitying authority The security certificate date is valid ity The name on the security certificate is invalid or does not match the name of the site Do you want to proceed Yes View Certificate 7 Click Yes to proceed and the User Login page appears If No is selected the page remains blank and the user will not be able to see the User Login page To proceed go to the menu items of the
34. 40 39 0 31 Srandard 26 bet Format Resder i Invalid Second Card Read 2 Card Number a Reader 2 invalid Cord tayan Standard 26 bit Format Ext Denied Passhack Card Numbers Invalid First Card Read l Card Hiurnber z 23 Dec 200 Resader 4 Invalid Card 40 09 MELEE stendard 26 bet Format Reader 3 Iriealid Card 40 0 Standard 26 bet Format 23 Dec 2005 Reader 2 Invalid Card A0 03 0 3 Standard 26 bet Format 1 23 Dec 2005 Reader 4 Invalid Card 1 11 39 01 J 0 32 Standard 26 bit Format 172 16 10 92 Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 2 The Output Control screen will appear Output Control Selection of Panels to contral Panels Panel Name Central office Manual Control en 39 1 Motion Detector 1 Simulator Off M Change C On C Duration On 2 Motion Detector 2 Simulator Off No Change C On Duration On 3 Motion Detector 3 Simulator Off No Change C On Duration On 4 Motion Detector 4 Simulator Off f No Change C On C Duration On S Motion Detector 5 Simulator Off M Change C On Duration On 6 Light Control 1 Off No Change C On Duration On 7 Light Control 2 Off Ma Change On Duration On Undefined Output Point amp rf No Change C On Duration On 9 undefined Output Point 9 Off No Change On Duration On 10 Undefined Output Point 10 Off No Change C On C
35. 5 Select the appropriate Schedule from the list By default an unused Output Point is tied to No Schedule i e the Output will not be triggered 6 Click on the button NOTICE Activating the button within the pre defined Schedule intervals will cause the Output Relay to turn On m 7 Click on the button to return to main page 16 5 1 How to Generate a Print Preview of the Output Point Report Once you have completed configuring the Output Points a hardcopy can be printed out 1 From the first web page of the Output Setup click on the Output Point Report link A screen as shown below appears Output Description A11 Output Points LI ih a lu E 2 Select the desired Output Point from the Output Description list If all Output Points are required select All Output Points 3 Click on the shows an example of the report button for a print preview of the report The following screen capture Return To Output Point Setup Return To Selection Criteria Bosch Security Systems Pte Ltd J8C Jalan Peninpin Singapore 577180 utput Point yort Monday 30 Aug 2004 26 37 43 Output H 1 Description Hotion Detector 1 Zimulator Duration 0 seconds UU EDME ITem LL On Off No Schedule Disable transaction at Activity Ho e i e 4 Toreturn to the Output Setup web page click on the BE To eutput Point Setup tink 5 To generate a preview of other output points click on th
36. ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller How to Change the Access to Menu Items View Refers to having the right to access and view the contents of the menu item Save Refers to having the right to access and edit the contents of the menu item When only the Save function for the menu item is checked the system would treat that both View and Save function is enabled 1 To assign the various menu item access rights check the checkbox of the desired menu item under View and or Save column To de select the point click on it again E 2 Click on the icon to save the settings The new settings will only take effect upon the next successful login Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Panel Setuplen 71 9 9 1 Panel Setup This Chapter will provide a step by step guide to how to add an Access Easy Controller The Panel Setup allows us to identify the Access Easy Controller that will be managed by the Access Easy Master It will also show the connection status of the Access Easy Controller with the Access Easy Master Below is a screen of the Panel Setup Panel Setuja Panel Panel Description 1 Status i Central Office Connected zZ Gateway Office Connected 3 Undefined Panel 3 Not Setup 4 Undefined Panel 4 Not Setup 5 Undefined Panel 5 Mot Setup 6 Undefined Panel 6 Mot Setup ii Undefined Panel 7 Mot Setup B8 Undefined Panel 8 Not Setup q Undefined Fanel 9
37. Access Easy Master Controller 2 Select any of the Undefined Events to configure an Alarm Event Condition The following screen will appear B Hetuork Settings M viso Activity Setting ET Default Settings Card Format Set Data Time Alarmn Event Setup Alarm Priorite Setup ri nb condition bug Alarm Event Condition Setup 0000000 Alarm Event Condition 1 Description Undefined Event 1 Alarm Instruction None amp All Locations C Selected Locations Available Readers Asad lable 1 0 Points Selected List of Locations 4 3 Enter a name for the Alarm Event in the Description textbox 4 Choose the appropriate option button All Locations All Readers Input Points and Output Points are monitored for the events Selected Locations Only the Devices in the Selected List of Locations are monitored for the events In the case of this example choose Selected Locations as we only want those doors belonging to R amp D dept to display the alarm instruction message 5 If Selected Locations is chosen you will need to select the Readers or Input Points or Out put Points from the pull down list box The Available Readers list box contains all the readers that are available in the entire system Available Readers Available Reader Central Office Hain Entrance al Office FAD Dent Entry Reader Office Production Dept Entry Reader Office Production Dept Exit Reader Offi
38. Arm Now 11 Undefined Input Point 11 Disarmed Low f No Change C Arm Now 12 Undefined Input Point 12 Disarmed Low Mo Change C Arm Now 13 Undefined Input Point 13 Disarmed Low Mo Change C Arm Now 14 Undefined Input Point 14 Disarmed Low Mo Change C Arm Now 15 Undefined Input Point 15 Disarmed Low M Change C Arm Now 16 Undefined Input Point 16 Disarmed Low Mo Change C Arm Now How to Arm an Alarm Zone B f Click on id to Arm the Alarm Zone immediately The id icon indicates that the Alarm Zone is currently disarmed How to Disarm an Alarm Zone Click on idi to Disarm the Alarm Zone immediately The a icon indicates that the Alarm Zone is currently armed How to Arm Disarm a Group of Alarm Zones If you want to Arm Disarm multiple Alarm Zones select the Alarm Zones that you want to Arm Disarm by ticking on the check boxes and clicking on the submit icon Output Control The Output Control is one of the menu items of the Manual Control Group It allows user to check the status of all the Output Points and send a command to turn On Off the points man ually However if the Output Point is linked to an Input Point as a Status Output the status will not be indicated here Devices that can be controlled by the Output Points are alarm bells lighting circuits electric garage door openers etc Essentially any device that can be turned On and Off can be con trolled by the Output Control As this is a c
39. Browser Display Web Content Home Search Language Fonts Subscriptions Java Security Security cones Ratings o O00 00 Oo o0 oo Advanced Ix Forms AutoFill Q Forms amp utaComplete AutoFill Profile qz Receiving Files Q Download Options File Helpers Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd From the Toolbars click on Preferences Under Web Browser select Advanced see diagram below Select Update pages Always for Cache Internet Explorer Preferences History Remember the last places visited Cache Update pages Once per session Never size po MB _Empty Now Location MS Internet Cache an volume Macintosh HD Connections Support multiple connections Show server messages Max connections 4 Offline Browsing L Automatically connect to the Internet if a page is not cached Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 274 en APPENDIX F Initial Setup To Access Easy Controller ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 5 Use the Scrollbar to scroll down the listing to look for Proxies Internet Explorer Preferences If you are accessing the Internet through a network at your company or organization you can select internal servers gateways to Q Security cones manage Internet access Contact your network administrator for Ratings more information D Advanced a Enabled 2 Disabled xz Forms AutoFill Protocol Forms amp utoComplete Auto
40. Ci Co Die secnption Adios your computer 1o accaca mesures on a Meroe nebwon Motfy pa when this connection has limited anno connectivity 5 Click on Settings Protect my computer and network by limtng or preventing access bo thes computer irom tha hiama 6 Vinidews Frewall hein protect your caepuber by pinaring unaufotnad ipn kom gaming acce to your computer rough the inem er a network Q ome This setting blocks all cutee sources Ime conneching t exepubar wil the eco of Baa aon jer La ie RA Deni allom excepliona Delect tha when you connect fo public nebwodes in less secure horus Such pe sirpis pci val not be rmied when Vinicio Firewall bicis progres Selectona on ihe Excepbons Lab wil be ix CO inet recommended Aves using ta setting Turing o Vinee Frewall may mae thia Gimp a more vulnerable fo viruses and imide Windows Firewall i using your non domain settings Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual APPENDIX E Setting up a Timeserver en 261 Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 262 en APPENDIX E Setting up a Timeserver Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 f 9 g Click on the Add port T Windows Firewall Generel Exceptons Advanced kirangi Fepragal i bheckors incor natur aa Ticani Tor ghe programs and serios selected below Adding excepbona slows some programa be work better but maghi incre pour securty risk Progam and Services Name O
41. Controller server and Notebook using the industrial standard UTP Category 5 cable as shown below UTP Cat 5 Cable terminated with RJ45 connector on both ends Maxirmium Length af 100m Access Easy Controller Notebook with network card installed NOTICE The cable has to be terminated and polarised accordingly as shown Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 264 en APPENDIX F Initial Setup To Access Easy Controller ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller PC CROSSOVER PC TX 1 1 TX TX 2 2 TX RX 3 3 RX 4 4 5 5 RX 6 6 RX C Ses G The above drawing shows the Transmit T amp T and Receive R amp R lines between both end of the connectors being twisted The wires for pins 4 5 7 and 8 are connected without twist ing at both end of the connectors but are not drawn above The drawing below shows the full pin to pin connections with cable colour coding RJ45 Plug Cable Colour RJ45 Plug Pin standard Pin twisted es ee L s 1 VVhite Orange Or AN Ge Wwe breen Blue Ite Eue mDrBBH oo VWhite Brevwn Brown E Wl il Hooks facing down Hooks facing down ca The individual conductors should be arranged as indicated above taking reference to the pin numbers on the left standard 33 1 Procedure to set the IP Address of computer This section provides procedure to set the IP Address for the PC and Macintosh 33 1 1 For PC Users Fol
42. Converter is denotes the address connected to of the Converter Card Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Users en 229 24 Users Only one user can be assigned access rights to access and carry out the functions of the Access Easy for Master By default User1 is defined as the Super User having access to Access Easy for Master fea tures 24 1 To activate Users Since Users is the first menu item of the Panel Admin group from the Home page click on Panel Admin or its icon button However if you are in other menu item page click directly on the Users link Panel Admin f e Dial In User 24 1 1 To edit User ID and Password 1 Click on the numbering or the Description text to proceed Panel Admin User Name USERI ES 2 To edit the User Name highlight the default User Name and enter the new User Name lim iting to eight alohanumerical characters including punctuation marks 3 To edit the Password highlight the default Password and enter the new Password limiting to eight alohanumerical characters including punctuation marks see NOTICE 1 and 2 NOTICE 1 The Password is case sensitive 2 For security reason every character entered for the Password is represented by an aster isk For Macintosh user it is represented by a dot instead Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 230 en Dial in
43. DPaninpin Sangapoera L7TTLIED Card Assignment Report Thursday l1 Sap 2005 12 40 44 Legends Any diam Cary Bekes fo phie te face Dien Moti Sick Cony Beier mast pide bp hex cchegulez oe wash oe ceeiumctiem wb Renier Dp Ex Eh Aloe exit render uta en Ay ae amp nth tme scheguler Cary PIN Cary CIN i phu ar Bee melden Enable End Cary hebes con enable enmeyerent aperto Cea Tan deceres Cary Bou wd oen dive access only Extunded Extended durztion l or deer access a Cand Mamoe Card Format Aem Deere Simt date Facility Access bewel Gin Freid 3 WUalldap Sch End Dyte caede Department Card Tppc Gina Fh 2 Ewit Seh Ex Een ded Fidi One Finee Accerr Dual Cord Argignment Card 4 gp Pme Descent Access rp A Access Group A 1 9 Anna EKaranina Standard 26 bit Format Hot sa acted 11 Sap 2003 Full Accazs Laval Selactad T iri M Global Salacted 0 seconds Hat Rok Salactac Het A sienaed Selected Sala cad z 2 402 Jehan Clinton Het Selected ii Mar 2005 Full Accaxz Leval Selected anne Engm eting Glebal Selected zecondz Ho Selected Hot Selected Het Arxigned Selected aie rs d Pags 1 cfi It contains all the details found under the Card Details and Card Functionality Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Access Levels en 65 7 Access Levels An Access Level is defined as a group of Access Groups while an Access Group defines a list of readers within certain authorised t
44. Door Forced Open 3 After selecting the criteria that you need click on the to load it 4 The screen will refresh and the Report Generation page will be shown with the settings of the loaded criteria Now all you need to do is set the Date and Time range and you could click to generate your report based on the loaded criteria Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Report Generation en 115 13 4 13 4 1 How To Generate Audit Log Report Audit Log records all the changes to the system parameters and who made the changes It is a means to trace back what was done to the system by the login user There are 2 types of audit trail report that can be generated they are gt User Log P System Log The following section provides a step by step guide to generate the reports User Log The User Log provides a report on who has login and when it was done It also captures the changes done by the User in the system 1 From the Report Generation page click on 9 Audit Lag Report and the Audit Log Report page will appear as shown below By default the User Log page is shown fudit log Report Generation User Log C System Log Month Year Day Month Year Day From 16 zl aug zi 2004 zd To 26 zl aug zd 2004 zl Available Users Selected list of Users H L e mos LE I Pr h me m 2 Select the From Date and the To Date 3 The User Log R
45. Duration On 11 Undefined Output Point 11 Off f Mo Change C On C Duration On 12 undefined Output Point 12 Off No Change C On C Duration On 13 undefined Output Point 13 Off Mo Change On Duration On 14 undefined Output Point 14 Off Ma Change C On Duration On 15 Undefined Output Point 15 Off No Change C On Duration On 16 undefined Output Point 16 Off No Change C On Duration On Description provides the Controller Name and the Output Points allocated to it Current Status provides us with the current status of the Output Points On status indicates that the Output Point is currently activated and Off status indicates that the Output Point is currently not activated Manual Actions provide us with radio buttons for performing manual actions The next radio button is for toggling the status between On Off There are 4 types of action command available O Selecting the radio button next to it will send a command to turn On the Out put Point when submitted n ff Selecting the radio button next to it will send a command to turn Off the Out put Point when submitted Duration On Selecting the radio button next to it will send a command to turn On the Out HU put Point for a pre defined Duration when submitted Duration Off Selecting the radio button next to it will send a command to turn Off the Out und put Point for a pre defined Duration when submitted The pre defined duration for the Duration On and Durat
46. Entry and Arm Disarm Reader The Output Link is also reduced to controlling nvalid Card Output only in an Elevator Reader Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 130 en Panels Admin ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 16 3 2 Reader Options Panel Admin Panel 3 Card Readers Reader 1 Description Main Entrance Reader Function eo Settings rin Code Settings Ql Anti Passback e pus Card AFB Settings Configuration D Turn off the reader E Enable Keypad Only Operation M Qn Holidays follow holiday schedules ta work in conjunction with Card Functionality Keypad Timeout 0 255 seconds Enable reader lockout C Unlock door ite Schedules will not be used to unlock this door C Schedules will be used to unlock this door C Schedules and holidays will be used to unlock this door Schedule No Schedule zl n Only after a valid access condition lt a 4 ES ET g x E This section allows user to configure parameters in relation to the Reader User can de acti vate the Reader to prevent access by anyone or allow access by entering the Card Number manually and or access in accordance to Holiday Schedules A screen of the Reader Options page is shown above Turn off the reader Once a Reader is turned off it will not read any card The door will be locked and all access will be denied For Arm Disarm Reader turning off the reader prevents arming and disarming through the Read
47. Expired Setting of User Pin 1 7 digits Setting of Extended duration for door access Card Validation Dates i Dual Card Assignment 2 aq r Assignment of Cards is done in the Card Assignment page Click on Card Assignment from the Main Menu to see the list of currently configured cards In the Access Easy Master cards that are added will be synchronized to all the on line Control lers at the moment the cards are added If a new Controller is connected to the Access Easy Master only after the cards are added user will have to manually synchronize the card data base to the Controller by clicking on the j button for that Controller in the Panel Setup page Please refer to Chapter 9 Panel Setup for details Cards that are added allow its cardholder to access doors from different Access Easy Control lers that are managed by the Access Easy Master provided the Access Levels Access Groups and Schedules are properly configured Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 42 en Card Assignment ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 6 1 6 1 1 Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 The Card Parameters Each Card has its own field that identifies its operation and usage We will need to pre config ure these fields properly before it can be used by the cardholder The Card Assignment screen is divided into 2 sections Card Details and Card Functionality The Card Details contain the settings to identify the card and t
48. Group It allows user to reset the Anti Passback APB feature once it is violated NOTICE This feature is applicable to Full and Soft Anti Passback only Please refer to the previous section on How to Setup Card Readers Anti Passback APB Set tings If Full APB is used this command will reset the violation and allow violator s to access or exit the controlled door However if Soft APB is used this command will reset the Activity transac tions for Access Granted Soft APB and Exit Granted Soft APB for violator s subsequent access or exit respectively User is given the option to reset the APB violation with the following combination gt By Card Number with respect to wrt Reader All Readers or gt By Name with respect to Reader All Readers or gt By All Card Numbers with respect to Reader All Readers To Reset APB select the target Access Easy Controller and click on the Reset APB hyperlink The following page will appear in a new window Panel Admin Panel 3 Reset Anti PFasshack Card Number Facility Code o Card Format All Card Formats By Name Search Option Hame By Reader Description fall Readers How To Reset APB by Card Number wrt Reader All Readers To Reset APB based on Card Number you must know the following Card Number its Facility Code and its Card Format 1 Enter the Card Number of the APB violator 2 The number in the Fac
49. Group 13 Undefined Access Group 14 ndefined 4 r fi r Undefined Access Group 17 Undefined Access Group 18 ndefined r Jndefin Cees Group 20 Undefined Access Group 21 Undefined Access Group 22 FEBERE nl ERE IS re ko I yen jon Ls Boo die di Ts MJ ndefined rou 3 Undefined Access Group 24 a F i E Undefined Access Group 26 Undefined Access Group 27 Undefined Access Group 28 s Eales Ea fs s 1 Click on the 8 1 27 or 125 254 ink to list the appropriate Access Groups ranges Alternatively you can click on the button to go to 128 254 range listings or the CS uo to go to the 1 127 range listings Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Panels Admin en 125 16 2 1 How to Configure Edit Access Group parameters 1 Click on the Grp or the Description text to proceed A screen as shown below appears Access Groups Access Group 1 Description Production Team Access Group T Main Entrance Hrs Timezone W Side Entrance Normal Schedule R amp D Dept Entry Reader No Schedule W Production Dept Entry Reader Production Tean A Schedule 2 3 4 5 Production Dept Ext Reader 2202 2 2 2 0 00 b n a Praject Dept Entry Reader No Schedule Sales Dept Entry Reader No Schedule Service Dept Entry Reader No Schedule zi i e ere SOR 3o cue L st T NOTICE The Reader s Description shown abo
50. How to Generate a Print Preview of the Access Groups Report How to Setup Card Readers Reader Function Reader Options Scheduling Options Door Output Settings For Entry Reader Entry and Arm Disarm Reader Door Input Settings For Entry Reader Entry and Arm Disarm Reader Floor Output Settings For Elevator Reader Only PIN Code Settings Anti Passback APB Settings Dual Card Configuration How to generate a Print Preview of the Card Reader Report Input Setup Alarm Zone Description How to generate a Print Preview of the Input Point Report Output Setup How to Generate a Print Preview of the Output Point Report Advance I O Setup Guard Tour Feed Through Software Manual Table of Contents en 7 97 97 97 99 101 105 106 106 113 114 115 115 116 118 118 120 121 121 122 122 123 123 124 125 126 127 128 130 132 134 135 137 138 140 143 144 145 148 149 150 152 153 153 154 Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 8 en Table of Contents 16 6 3 16 6 4 16 6 5 16 6 6 16 6 7 16 6 8 16 6 9 16 6 10 16 7 16 7 1 16 7 2 16 8 16 8 1 16 8 2 16 8 3 16 8 4 16 8 5 16 8 6 16 8 7 16 8 8 16 9 16 9 1 16 9 2 16 9 3 17 17 1 uly genet 17 1 2 Lr 17 2 17 2 1 17 2 2 18 18 1 18 2 18 2 1 18 2 2 18 3 18 3 1 18 3 2 18 3 3 18 3 4 18 4 19 19 1 19 Ll Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 OR Logic AND Logic XOR Logic NAND Logic Interlock Man Trap Up Down Counter Exit Door One Sho
51. Master s software is residing within its hardware The Reboot Panel menu item allows user to reboot the controller after upgrading to the system software is com pleted or in order to allow changes made to take effect especially changes made to Network Setting Panel s IP Address CAUTION During a Reboot Panel function all settings and parameters are taken from the flash memo ries In such a case it is important that the Database Backup function is carried out before proceeding to reboot the Access Easy for Master To activate Reboot Panel The Reboot Panel can be activated only from the menu item page 1 From any menu item page click on the Reboot Panel hyperlink The following dialog box appears for confirmation Microsoft Internet Explorer 2 Do you really want to restart the panel E Cancel 2 Click on the OK button to proceed 3 It takes about two minutes for the process to complete see NOTICE NOTICE During the rebooting process the Access Easy for Master disconnect itself from the computer and the web page on the computer screen might show an error message or be completely blank User s must close and re launch the web browser program Login to Access Easy for Master again after the process is completed 4 Once the Access Easy for Master is up and running again please re enter the Access Easy for Master URL Address and proceed with the Login Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1
52. O indicates that the check box for Start Date in Access Easy Master is NOT checked 1 indicates that the check box is checked the year for the Start Date for the card to take effect sents the month for the Start Date for the card to take effect the day for the Start Date for the card to take effect End Date O indicates that the check box for End Date in Access Easy Master is NOT checked 1 indicates that the check box is checked Year The number in this Year column in the exported CSV file represents the year for the End Date for the card to cease being effective Month The number in this Month column in the exported CSV file repre sents the month for the End Date for the card to cease being effec tive Day The number in this Day column in the exported CSV file represents the day for the End Date for the card to cease being effective Dual Card Assignment O indicates that the radio button for Dual Card not assigned is selected 1 indicates that the radio button for Dual Card presenta tion sequence is selected Dual Card Presenta O indicates that First Card is selected for Dual Card presentation tion Sequence sequence 1 indicates that Second Card is selected and 2 indi cates that Don t Care is selected Group ID The number in the Dual Card Group ID column indicates the group ID the card falls into Card Pin The number in the Card Pin column indicated the encrypted card pin number Defaul
53. P A 1 172 i amp 10 i remocokehocsti z 123 2 142 remotehostZ 3 125 3 remotehcosti DE The Outgoing Mail SMTP Server defines the server that is to provide your email facilities and the Access Easy for Master Email Address Name is the reply address for emails sent by the Access Easy for Master that is the name address that is to appear in the sent to field of the dispatched email Panel Admin Panel Setup input Point Configuration Set Datesting P Budit Log Default Settings i Card Formst como Profile Emalsms configuration e Network Settings e ois n P Settings e cn C Settings e MS Server it Outgoing Mail SMTP Server 172 16 10 32 Outgoing Mail SMTP Server Port 25 AEC s Email Address Hame AECShOsch com sg Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 218 en Panel Setup 23 4 1 23 5 Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller To Configure the Email Server Setup Information 1 Highlight the default text in the Outgoing Mail SMTP Server field and enter the appro priate text 2 The default number 25 is the commonly used port number for the Outgoing Mail SMTP Server unless your configuration is different we suggest you skip this field 3 Enter the Access Easy for Master Address Name as a complete word with no spacing in between You can use the underscore to denote spacing The
54. Page Dialog Option A All existing cards in the database will be deleted before importing Option B Only the new cards are imported to the database Automatically gynchronige cards to the panels 5 There are 2 options that user can choose from Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Card Assignment en 57 6 3 3 6 3 4 Option A When this option is selected the existing database will be deleted before the new database are imported Option B When this option is selected only the new cards are imported to the database Cancel Cancel the import function NOTICE If you wish to synchronise the new database to all the controllers please check the box first before selecting your desired option 6 Thecard database will be imported into the system Cards Enrolment Operation This function is to facilitate selected card holders to have the right to use their card to activate a Reader to be in enrolment mode Card Enrolment of Card with Unknown Wiegand Format To use any unknown proprietary wiegand card format administrator can activate a Reader either by pre assigned enrolment card or by web page to be in enrolment mode and enrol any card into the card database maximum bit length is 64 The sections below will guide the administrator on how to activate a Reader to be in enrolment mode both by enrolment card and by web page Card Enrolment Using Web P
55. Reader 6 7 8 10 Reader 10 11 Reader 11 12 Reader 12 13 Reader 13 14 Reader 14 15 Reader 15 16 Reader 16 Locked Closed e Locked Closed Locked Closed Locked Closed v Unlocked Closed amp Unlocked Closed e Unlocked Closed Unlocked Closed s Unlocked Closed Unlocked Closed Unlocked Closed Unlocked Closed v Unlocked Closed i No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change Mo Change C Lock Mo Change Lock No Change Lock Mo Change C Lock Mo Change C Lock No Change C Lock Mo Change Lock How to Lock Reader Controlled Door C Unlock C Momentarily Unlock C Unlock C Momentarily Unlock C Unlock C Momentarily Unlock C Unlock Momentarily Unlock C Lock C Momentarily Unlock No Change C Lock C Momentarily Unlock C Momentarily Unlock C Momentarily Unlock C Momentarily Unlock C Momentarily Unlock C Momentarily Unlock C Momentarily Unlock C Momentary Unlock C Momentarily Unlock Control en 31 To lock a specific door for an extended period of time click on the Lock radio button Panels fall Panel Name Central Office 1 Main Entrance Side Entrance R amp D Dept Entry Reader Production Dept Entry Reader Reader 6 Reader 7 Reader 8 9 Reader 9 10 Reader 10 ii Reader ii 12 Reader 12 13 Reader 13 14 Reader 14 15 Reader 15 16 Reader 16 z 3 4 5 Reader 5 6 ri 8 Click on Lock
56. Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller APPENDIX F Initial Setup To Access Easy Controller en 277 Selection Criteria far Audit Log Bosch Security Systems Pte Ltd JEC Jalan Peninpin Singapore 5771 0 System Log Tuesday 12 Mer 2002 11 43 42 OO 04 5F 80 36 B0 Internet Address 1279 2 0 200 Last Boot Time Sat Mou Z 02 37 04 GMT Foo Current Boot Time i Tue Mou 12 10 51 46 GMT z z A Mao of Convertors Exist ea Convertor 1 Reader Parts 01 02 03 04 Reader IO 01 08 SIM serial number R cenie Selection Criteria for Audit Lo With the mac address we could now use arp to change the IP address of the Access Easy for Master From any of your remote PCs issue the following commands from the command prompt If you are using Windows NT or Windows 98 arp s lt new address you want to specify for your Access Easy for Master gt lt mac address of your Access Easy Controller gt ping lt new address you have just set gt to check connectivity to the Access Easy Controller for example if you want to change the address of your Access Easy for Master to 129 3 0 99 and the mac address of your Access Easy Controller is 52 54 4c 0 0 2c the command will be arp s 129 3 0 99 52 54 4c 0 0 2c ping 129 3 0 99 If you are using Windows 95 arp s new address you want to specify for your Access Easy for Master mac address of your Access Easy Controller address of your PC ping n
57. SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Indicates that the door is locked permanently Indicates that the door is unlocked and open Indicates that the door is unlocked and close Indicates that door is forced open Indicates that door is held open beyond a period of time Exceeded the time settings of Door Open Timer Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 202 en Door Control 19 1 1 Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Manual Actions provide user with radio buttons selection of what manual action to perform The description of the second radio button is the opposite of the current status and it will tog gle between Lock and Unlock The third radio button Momentary Unlock is used to send a command to momentarily unlocked the door for a duration as specified by the Door Strike Timer This command is only effective when the current status of the door is Locked To control the Doors manually 1 Select the desired action radio button s see NOTICE 1 2 Click on either Or T button to send the command The web page will refresh to reflect the new status NOTICE 1 Select only door s that you want to send command to 2 The current status of the door for a Momentarily Unlocked command will not show the true status after the Door Strike Timer has elapsed unless the user refreshes the web page by click on the B button Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Input Co
58. Search By Card and Search By Name function respectively Please refer to the explanation in the section on Card Assignment The Search Function for detail 5 Select the Cardholder and click on the button The selected cardholder appears in the List of Selected Cardholders window Repeat step 5 if you have other cardholders to put on the list NOTICE The List of Selected Cardholders window has a limit of up to 80 entries 6 Todelete selected Cardholder click on the Cardholder s name in the window followed by the 9 button Repeat step 6 if necessary Oo 7 When you finish your selection click on the button Sample Email Configuration for Lateness Report This section provides you with sample configuration for Lateness Report The sample will instruct you on what to select for the four selection criteria Devices Cardholders Events and Lateness Report in order to send out the email successfully Please refer to the Appendix Email Configuration Table for more detailed configuration based on other Events For Lateness Report to be sent out the items Devices Cardholders and Events have to be disabled That is the Selected or Omit option is chosen but no specific parameter is selected The following screen capture shows the selection criteria for Devices Cardholders Events and Lateness Report respectively Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Panels Admin
59. The SOFTWARE PRODUCT is protected by copyright laws and international copyright treaties as well as intellectual property laws and treaties The SOFTWARE PRODUCT is licensed not sold 1 GRANT OF LICENSE The SOFTWARE PRODUCT refers to the Access Easy Master Control ler Software that runs on the Access Easy Master Controller that enables a com puter or workstation running a Web Browser Software Third Party Software to access or utilise the services provided by the Access Easy Master Controller Access control This EULA grants to you the following rights to the SOFTWARE PRODUCT P Use of the Server Software You may use one copy of the Server Software running on one Server which may be connected at any point in time an unlimited number of worksta tions or computers operating on one or more networks You must acquire a separate Cli ent Application Software License to access or otherwise utilise the services of the Server by using the Third Party Software 2 DESCRIPTION OF OTHER RIGHTS AND LIMITATION P Client Access Licenses This EULA grants you the number of Client Access Licenses for the SOFTWARE PRODUCT indicated at the top of this EULA Each licenses permits one additional computer or workstation the right to access or utilise the services of the Server The services of the Server are considered to have accessed or utilised when there is a direct or indirect connection between a computer or workstation and a Server Re
60. Unlock 10 Reader 10 Unlocked Closed No Change Lock C Momentarily Unlock 11 Reader 11 Unlocked Closed No Change Lock C Momentarily Unlock 12 Reader 12 Unlocked Closed No Change Lock C Momentarily Unlock 13 Reader 13 Unlocked Closed amp No Change Lock C Momentarily Unlock 1d Reader i4 Unlocked Closed No Change Lock C Momentanly Unlock 15 Reader 15 Unlocked Closed No Change Lock C Momentarily Unlock 16 Reader 16 Unlocked Closed No Change Lock C Momentarily Unlock 2 Click on T icon to submit send the command The selected door will now be Unlocked Cardholders can now pass through the door without presenting a card to the Reader The door will remain Unlocked until they are relocked At the same time that the door is Unlocked Access Easy Master will refresh the Door Control screen and update both the Current Status and the command radio buttons so they will be ready for the next command The following screen shows an example of the Current Status of two doors named Reader 7 and Reader 8 in Unlocked Closed mode and the command radio button config ured for Lock mode Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Poor Control Panels A11 Manual Panel Name Central Office 1 Main Entrance 5 1 2 1 Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Side Entrance R amp D Dept Entry Reader Production Dept Entry Reader e 3 4 5 Reader 5 6
61. User ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 25 Dial in User Dial in user is a feature available in Access Easy for Master by which a user can connect to Access Easy for Master through telephone dial in This feature is useful when a user wants to remotely connect to his Access Easy Controller The following steps will explain how to use this feature 25 1 Setting up Windows for Dial in The steps below will explain how to make your Access Easy for Master receive a dial in request from a PC 1 Logon to Access Easy for Master From any window of Access Easy for Master click on users You will see a screen that displays the users On this screen click on the dial in user button as shown in the screen shot below Panel Admin gi Dial In User 1 USER 2 Next you will come to a screen which displays the dial in user name and password Enter the User name and password in the appropriate boxes and click on save button indicated by floppy icon l Panel Admin fe Users User Name PEP Password Dial In Settings Number of illegal password attempts Undefined Illegal attempts lockout duration a minutes 0 255 x Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Dial in User en 231 NOTICE CHANGE THE DEFAULT USER NAME AND PASSWORD AND SAVE THE NEW SETTINGS BY CLICKING ON SAVE BUTTON INDICATED BY FLOPPY ICON 3 The default user name and pa
62. a LJ 5 There are up to 10 Remote Controller addresses that you could configure These addresses are the IP Address of those access easy controllers that send SMS messages via the SMS Server you should include the IP address of this AEC that has the GSM adapter connected to it T 6 Click on the 999 button to save the new settings Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Panel Setup en 223 To Configure Access Easy for Master as a SMS Client By default the SMS Server IP address is blank If this controller is not attached to a GSM adapter it is a SMS Client and hence need to identify the IP Address of the SMS Server To change this setting click on the SMS Server IP Settings to access to the setting page as shown in the following diagram Panel Admin 2anel s IP Address 172 16 10 88 anel s IP Hetmask 2755 255 255 0 anels Gateway 172 16 i10 1 1 Remote PC Address 1 172 15 i10 i1 remctehcxti z 123 2 a0 242 remotehost2 3 123 2 43 remokehosti 1 The SMS Server Setting page is shown below Panel Admin SHS Server IP GSM Modem Connected Yes No mp 2 Since this is an SMS Client we will need to enter the IP Address of the SMS Server in the i SMS Server IP field and click the save Lan button 3 You will need to reboot the Access Easy for Master for the changes to tak
63. alarms will still remain on the screen till they are acknowledged by the user Process Alarm Transactions New alarms are shown in yellow background and red text They will remain so till the user acknowledges the alarms Refreshing the screen will not change the background to grey as it will for Valid and Restore transactions Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Activity en 27 User needs to acknowledge the alarm by clicking on the button This action will cause the Alarm Instruction Details window to pop up as shown below However this button is only shown when the View Activity page is in Alarm transactions When viewing Valid Restore All or Time Attendance transactions the button is not shown e Alarm Instruction Details Microsoft Internet Explorer Location R amp D Motion Detector PIR 1 User Name Alarm Description Alarm Instruction Unacknowledge Alarms 3 Acknowledge all alarms Check this check box if gt gm vou want to acknowledge Es This window shows the alarm that you are acknowledging and the instruction message pre configured in the system for this alarm NOTICE Access Easy Master allows the user to configure instruction messages to different alarms These instruction messages can be configured in Chapter 12 Server Setup Alarm Event Setup Alarm Instruction Message Setup for details Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ve
64. an address and then type it in the space below C Obtain an IP address automatically f Specify an IP address IP Address 129 2 0 40 SubnetMask 255 255 0 Ol Cancel 11 Click on OK button 12 Reboot the computer in order for the setting to take effect Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 268 en APPENDIX F Initial Setup To Access Easy Controller ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 33 2 For Macintosh Users Follow through the procedures to set the IP Address for the Macintosh 1 Click on the Apple icon to show a list of control function 2 Select Control Panels TCP IP The TCP IP dialog box appears File Edit View Special ub Help About This Computer Adobe Gamma gp Apple System Profiler Appearance AppleCD Audio Player Apple Menu Options i Automated Tasks p AppleTalk Calculator Colorsync i r Fhnnssr Configuration Manager Control Strip Control Panels late amp Time if Favorites lialfissist je Faustatus EditCDev d Graphing Calculator Energy Saver 3 Internet Access H Extensions Manager EM Jigsaw Puzzle File Exchange Key Caps File Sharing e Memory DR General Controls Internet ml Network Browser keynoard AAIE can ee Launcher Recent Applications P Location Manager Recent Documents gt MacLinkPlus Setup CW ES Recent Servers b Memory c Remote Access Status MenuScript Scrapbook Menuscript PPC a Sherlock Modem
65. and 1 0 Points a This check box must be selected to include Device in the All Readers 7705 All 17 0 Points v Selected Readers and 1 0 Points criteria Available Readers jAvailable IO Points E List of selected Readers and I 0 Points MAX 50 Cent ral T ice RAD Hain Entrance Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 110 en Report Generation ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 7 Click on the Card Holders hyperlink to go to the next configuration page A screen as shown below appears Hetivity Report Generation Card Hold rs This check box must be selected to include Card Halders in the criteria Selected List of Card Holders MAX 50 8 This page allows you to configure the Cardholders that should be included in the report criteria Check the Card Holders check box to include this selection in the criteria Take note that some of the activities do not have the cardholder s ID included Activities such as Panel Tampered Exit Grant Door Force Open etc do not require the Card Holder selection to be configured NOTICE Care should be taken when including the Card Holders selection into the criteria By including the Card Holders into the criteria activities that do not require this will not appear in the report such as Panel Tampered Exit Grant Door Force Open etc Please refer to Appendix A Selecting Events Devices And Cardholders For Report Generation for a gu
66. as all these parameters relate to the individual cardholder Consider an example To assign cards with numbers from 101 to 110 to certain staffs This range of cards have the Facility Code of 200 and of Standard 26 bit Card Format Using card number 10 of Facility Code 3 and BOSCH ADC Proprietary Card Format to be our reference card for the new card setting we proceed as follows 1 Click on the ih icon for Batch Cards and enter the relevant fields as shown Batch Cards 0000000000000 Card x 101 Facility Code VE Card Format BOSCH ADC Proprietary Format Access Level Please select an Access Level Details Number Of Cards 10 Add Options Copy From Global Card i Facility Cade 3 Card Format BOSCH ADC Proprietary Format Automatically replace existing card s with default reference card information 2 Click on the the Batch operation completed message would be shown icon to proceed If there is no error during the card numbers addition How to Use Automatically replace the existing card s with default reference card information function This function will overwrite all data within a card number when the software encounters exist ing card number with same Card Format Facility Code and Card Number during Batch Cards function It allows recycling of card number allocation when employee resigns The function will be activated when a tick appears in the check box Automatically replace exist ing card
67. as shown below will appear tad in Batch Ls ards Cards Enrollment Reader Reader 1 wv Card LlAute Assignment Hame Access Level Please select an Access Level Details Qr Ox0U00000002E3DE 40 2b List af scanned cards Add Options Copy Fram Global Card x Facility Code 1 Card Format BOSCH ADC Proprietary Format M Automatically replace existing card s with default reference card information To n L m n 2 Present the pre assigned enrolment card to a Reader The Reader is now activated to be in enrolment mode If the pre assigned enrolment card also has access right to the Reader press key 7 on the Keypad before presenting the pre assigned enrolment card 3 Present the card with unknown Wiegand Format to the enrolment Reader If key 7 is pressed before presenting the pre assigned enrolment card the timing on Keypad Time out will have to be observed This means that when a pre assigned enrolment card is pre sented to the Reader to activate the Reader as an enrolment Reader the new card to be added to the panel has to be presented to the same Reader within the timing set in Key pad Timeout Failure to do so will cause the Reader to return to normal mode For the setting of timing on the Keypad Timeout please refer to Chapter 16 Panels Admin Card Readers Keypad Timeout The card that has been presented to the enrolment Reader will appear in the box for List of scanned cards as shown in the s
68. before the Panel locks it back again It can range from O to 255 seconds The factory default is 5 seconds Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Panels Admin en 135 16 3 5 NOTICE When the Door Strike Timer is set to O and a valid card is presented at the Reader the door becomes unlocked View Activity shows Door Unlocked until the same card or another valid card is presented at the Reader only then the Reader will go back to locked mode View Activ ity shows Door Locked Presenting an invalid card will not change the status View Acivity will only show Invalid Card Door Strike For the Output device such as Door Strike though it is pre defined user can still change the default address to other available addresses within the same Reader board should the origi nal output relay is defective To allocate an Output Address for Door Strike select Output for Source else select None After allocating Output to Source select an Address for it The default Address is 1 The Address can be chosen from a selectable range Output It defines the physical output on the Reader board The output channels are applicable for Door Strike Door Forced Alarm Output Door Held Alarm Output and Invalid Card Output Output channel assignment for devices connected in relation to the Reader is selectable within the spare Output channels of the card User can disable the Output channel by selecting None
69. button If selection is made on either Selected Events Only or Omit these Selected Events Only a window and a pull down list appear as shown below Access Denied Passback List of Selected Events Select an Event Panel Tamper Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Panels Admin en 173 4 Select the desired Event and click on the button The selected Event appears in the List of Selected Events window Repeat step 4 if you have other Events to put on the list 5 To delete selected Event s click on the Event in the window followed by the but _ ton Repeat step 5 if necessary When you finish your selection click on the an button User can refer to Appendix D Email SMS Configuration Table for the combination of Devices Cardholders and Events to select 16 8 6 Lateness Report This web page allows user to configure the Lateness Report NOTICE The Lateness Report is to be used for keeping track of employee presence at the work place It will consider an employee to be present for work once a transaction bearing the employee s card number is transacted Card number s not transacted after the Attendance Cut off Time is regarded as late for work To edit the Email Configuration Lateness Report 1 Click on the Lateness Report link or the gt button from the Events web page Send Ta Message Devices Cardholders Events Latene
70. button Duration On or Duration Off which is the opposite of the current sta tus is used to send a command to turn on or turn off the Output Point for a duration as depicted in the Duration field in Output Setup menu item Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 210 en Output Control ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 21 1 1 To control the Output Points 1 Click on the appropriate link 8 146 or 827 32 to display the correct range of Output Points Alternatively you can click on the 5 or e button 2 Select the desired radio button s see NOTICE 1 3 Click on either or 3 button to send the command The web page will refresh to reflect the new status NOTICE 1 Select only Output Point s that you want to send command to 2 The current status of the Output Point for a Duration On or Duration Off command will not show the true status after the Duration has elapsed unless the user refreshes the web page by clicking on the is button Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Reset APB en 211 22 Reset APB The Reset APB is the final menu item of the Manual Control Group It allows user to reset the Anti Passback APB feature once it is violated NOTICE This feature is applicable to Full and Soft Anti Passback only If Full APB is used this command will reset the violation and allow violator s to access or exit th
71. by which you identify your PC or Access Easy Control ler A mac address is the hardware address of the network device With the help of the arp command the address of the Access Easy Controller can be cust omised according to your network You need not know the previous address of your Access Easy Controller to use the arp command but you will need to know the mac address of the Access Easy Controller The mac address is listed in the System Audit log of the Access Easy Controller To find out the mac address you will need to first log in to the Access Easy Con troller and follows the steps as shown on the following page Click on Panel Admin at the Home page of the Access Easy for Master Click on Panel Setup on the left panel menu selection Click on Audit Log to bring you to the page as shown in the following Panel Admin Panel Setup nal Metwark Settings e ut Paint Configuration e Set Date amp Time e Auto Logout Timer n Audit Laq e Default Settings F Card Format Company Profile n2 Emai sMs Configuration User Log From Day Month Year Ta Day Month Year Mame Ali Names C System Log j a e mo MAU A Check the System Log radio button and click the list button to shows the report The following shows the report generated take note of the Hardware address which is the mac address that we need Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual
72. configurations except IP address This action is irre versible Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 242 en Update Flash ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 26 1 1 To Update Panel Software 1 Click on button to select the file you wish to upload example if you are uploading the backup system database select the db tar gz from your local director Panel Maintenance Update Flash List of Uploaded Files Delete All Files Fila Name C 129 2 0 116 db tar gz Browse Upload File Clear Entries Click Start to proceed This will load software updates into the panels flash memory 2 Clickon Vpload File button to upload 3 Once the file appears in the List of Uploaded Files you could now click on the B icon to start the updating process The following dialog box will appear for confirmation Microsoft Internet Explorer Q Database backup will take 30 45 seconds Proceed E Cancel 4 Click on the OK button to proceed 5 Once the process is completed without error the following message will appear Upgrade Operation Completed Y ou need to reboot the system for the changes to take effect 6 Click on the e button and reboot the Access Easy for Master Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Reboot Panel en 243 27 27 1 Reboot Panel Since the Access Easy for
73. count 3 Wer count f 1 Goto Wsyne Log runlevel ito lvl 3 4 20 31_ 95 Mon Dec l2 11 20 14 05 11 02 45 reboot system boot zZ 4 2 0 31 39 Mon Dec lf ll z rllT0z 45 shutdown system down z 4 z0 31 39 Mon Dec 12 11 19 14 05 11 02 46 runlevel to lvl 6 4 20 31_ 95 Mon Dec 1l 11 13 11 18 ian ano The report provides some critical information such as Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Report Generation en 117 Hardware Address This is the physical address of the Access Easy Master It is a unique number We could use this number to set the IP address of the Access Easy Master using the ARP command Please refer to the Chapter How to Configure the IP address Internet Address This is the IP address of the Access Easy Master Serial Number Each SAM in the Access Easy Master has a unique number It serves as a license to the owner If the owner wants to increase the number of login User or connect more Access Easy Controller to the Access Easy Master he will have to register with Bosch using this number Panel Count The total number of Access Easy Controller s that are licensed and con PTT resmttotmeRcemte Me The total number of Login Users that are licensed Go to Wsync log Shows the wsync log between server and panel Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 118 en Database Backup ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 14 Databas
74. displayed as shown below follow steps 3 to 8 If the Security Alert box appears follow steps 7 to 8 gt wx S amp S c sme Stop Refresh Home Search Favorites Media Histo il The page cannot be displayed The page you are looking for is currently unavailable The Web site might be experiencing technical difficulties or you may need to adjust your browser settings Please try the following e Click the Refresh button ar try again later amp If you typed the page address in the Address bar make sure that it is spelled correctly To check your connection settings click the Tools menu and then click Internet Options On the Connections tab click Settings The settings should match those provided by your local area network LAN administrator or Internet service provider ISP If your Network Administrator has enabled it Micrasoft Windows can examine your network and automatically St internet 3 Goto the menu items of the web browser and select Tools Internet Options Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Logging In And Understanding Access Easy Master Main Menu en 15 Select Tools Internet Options E Google Microsoft Internet Explorer Je Egi View Favontes 5 Ascreen as shown below appears Check the Use SSL2 0 and Use SSL 3 0 box Just display the results in the main window Just go to the most likely site
75. format the search will still show all of them in the List of Persons Found Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 112 en Report Generation ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 13 To search by cardholder s name enter the name in the Name textbox and click on the cor responding button Access Easy Master will search through the card database and list out the cards that has similar name as shown below Activity Resort Generation D Load Criteria D Audit i a Card Holders Card Name John List of Person Found John Lim John Michael Vincent Selected List of Card Holders MAX 50 aac NOTICE The above screen shows 2 names in the List of Persons Found This is the result of searching the name John Access Easy Master will show all names that are similar allowing the user to find the one that he needs without knowing the full name of the cardholder 14 Click on the name of the cardholder to add to the Selected List of Card Holders 15 The next step will be to configure the Events selection Click on the Events hyperlink and the following screen will appear Activity Report Generation Load Criteria D Audit Log Report Date Time F Device ardHolders I Events Avai lable Events Selected List of Events MAX 50 This check box must be selected to include Events in the criteria NOTICE The Events will not be taken into consideration during the generation of
76. he TOCA network components ane installeg EE File and printer sharing for Microsoft Networks s Serica for Netware Directory Services LA Tak ELi He i Client for Microsoft Nebwork s T Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 184 en How to Configure the Access Easy Master IP Address ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 4 To add the TCP IP component click on the Add button The Select Network Component Type dialog box appears Select Network Component Type Click the type of network component you want to install Y Pratacnal Cancel Service Protocol iz a language a computer uses Computers must use the same protocol to communicate 5 Click on component type Protocol and click on the Add button The Select Network Proto col dialog box appears 6 Click on Microsoft and TCP IP as shown in the following screenshot Select Network Protocol Click the Network Protocol that you want to install then click OF IF you have x an installation disk for this device click Have Disk Manufacturers Network Protacals IPS PX compatible Protocal Microsoft 32 bit DLE Microsoft DLC MetBELII z Have Disk Cancel WAN support Far AT M 7 Click on the OK button to proceed with the component installation Follow through the on screen instruction to complete NOTICE You might be required to have your Windows Installation Disk in your CD ROM
77. the controller How to download database to Panel User can download database to the controller this allows user more control to select desired controller to update the database This feature is useful if some controllers in the system are not fully operational and the user does not wish to update these controllers yet Or a faulty controller is been replace with a new one hence the user could use this feature to download the database back to the new controller NOTICE Only controllers with the status Connected are able to download any new database to the controller 1 Click on the desired controller in this example Panel 15 selected Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 74 en Panel Setup ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Manal Setup i Hot Connected fined Panel 2 Hot Setup el Hot Setup Hot Setup Not Setup Hot Setup Not Setup Not Setup Hot Setup Hot Setup Not Setup Hot Setup Hot Setup IE Bro ker ndis io Ino e ln C E E P p S Hot Setu Hot Setup i i Not Setup 129 2 1 23 Connected Shales lak 2 Click on the e icon download the database 3 Click on OK to start overwrite the existing database of the selected controller Microsoft Internet Explorer YL Panel card database will be overwritten Continue 4 Once the new database is downloaded Click on the lt a icon to return Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte L
78. the date that will appear in the View Activity page and the reports to be generated in the Date sample box How to Edit the Time Format 1 Select the preferred Time format to be seen in the View Activity page and in all the reports generated 2 Select a Time separator if desired E 3 Click on the button User can then see a sample of the time that will appear in the View Activity page and the reports to be generated in the Time sample box Housekeeping Housekeeping allows the user to manage the Activity Log and Audit Log in the system User can delete the unwanted logs that are no longer required manually as well as to specify the number of days of the logs to be kept in the system and the system will store the logs of the most recent specified number of days only in the system Click on Housekeeping from the menu item list and you will see a screen as shown below Activity Log C Audit Log Day Month Year Day Month Year From 23 oet 2002 To 11 oct 2008 Number of days to keep unlimited m LII Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Server Setup en 97 12 8 1 12 8 2 12 9 Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd How to Use the Manual Housekeep 1 Select either the Activity Log or the Audit Log to housekeep by selecting the respective radio button Select the Day Month and Year of the From Date and the To Date This range of dates are the
79. tick mark To de select the point click on it again 2 Click on the button Alternatively click on the button to select the next sets of Input Points User can also select from the sets of inputs from the links at the top such as Readers 1 8 Readers 9 16 Inputs 1 16 or Inputs 17 32 Using Select All This is very useful if the number of Input Points need to be selected is more than of what is displayed You can use this function then de select those unwanted Input Points NOTICE The Select All and the Clear All function will only select clear the 16 Input Points seen on the current web page For the other Input Points on the other pages user will have to go to the page and select clear 1 To select all click on the Select All radio button To de select click on Clear All or Manual radio button 2 Click on the to refresh the screen and the selection returns to default Manual is selected If not all the nverted Input Points are required proceed to de select by clicking on its corresponding check boxes However if all Points are required you can straight 5 away click on the 99 button to save Alternatively click on the button to go to next sets of Input Points User can also select from the sets of inputs from the links at the top such as Readers 1 8 Readers 9 16 Inputs 1 16 or Inputs 17 32 Using Clear All This function works in reverse of the Select All function Please refer to the above procedur
80. to Alarm Zone 2 Input Point 5 is an independent input point The table below describes the possible grouping of the Input Point Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Manual Control en 35 Alarm Zone 1 Input Points in Alarm Zone 1 are displayed together They are to per temmetfdtemedtgets o S Alarm Zone 2 Input Points in Alarm Zone 2 are displayed together They are to pens teamed stared taster o SS Alarm Zone 3 Input Points in Alarm Zone 3 are displayed together They are to be armed disarmed together Alarm Zone 4 Input Points in Alarm Zone 4 are displayed together They are to be armed disarmed together Independent Input Point These are Independent Input Points which can be armed dis armed by itself Current Status column provides us with the current input point status The table below describes the possible status of the Input Point Current Status Description The respective Input Point is Armed Disarmed Low The respective Input Point is Disarmed and its current status is closed Disarmed High The respective Input Point is Disarmed and its current status is open An Alarm is detected from the Input Point Alarm Restored The alarm has been restored so that the Input Point is no longer in Alarm state Bypassed Low If the status of the Input Point is currently at Bypassed High after the Input Point contact is closed it becomes Bypassed Low Bypass
81. to On state This will cause the LED in the Guard Tour Output to be turned On And if the key is not removed after the Input Duration has lapsed the LED in the Guard Tour Alert Output will be turned On and the alarm will be activated to remind the guard that he has not removed the key from the key switch Feed Through This function is used when the output of a function block has to be fed into the input of another function block for further action This function will enable any type of output such as physical output link or reader control to follow the input such as physical input physical output link criteria or schedule Each item is explained in the above section Input Point Able to Arm Disarm by Other Type of Input Level or toggle input behavior can be selected fl Input Output fl Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Panels Admin en 155 Input Output Description Input source The input will be linked to the output directly It is edge triggered from O to 1 leading edge amp toggling Output The output is a direct link of the input 16 6 3 OR Logic This function is used in cases whereby the output of a function block is to be triggered when any one or more of the stated conditions is fulfilled In Advance I O Setup a maximum of 7 conditions is allowed The output is set to high when one or more of the stated inputs is set to high The following tab
82. with default reference card information x Highlight the card in the List of scanned cards that you are assigning the Card and Name to as shown in the screen below r Cards Enrollment Reader Reader 1 w Card s 1208 Caute assignment Name Julia Chua Access Level Full Access we GxOGO000N002E 3DE PO 2E List of scanned cards Add Options Copy From Global Card Facility Code p Card Format BOZCH ADC Proprietary Format 4 Automatically replace existing card s with default reference card information x Click on the button to add the card with the assigned Card and Name to the data base Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 60 en Card Assignment ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Card Enrolment Using Pre Assigned Enrolment Card A pre assigned enrolment card is a user card that has been checked with the option Card Holder Can Enable Enrolment Operation For the details on how to set a card to be a pre assigned enrolment card refer to the section Card Holder Can Enable Enrolment Operation above If the administrator chooses to enrol a card of unknown proprietary wiegand card format using pre assigned enrolment card he should follow the steps below 1 To goto the page as shown below select Card Assignment from the Left Pane followed by Batch Cards Pateh Cards Th at the top right corner and lastly select Go to Cards Enrolment S9 to Cards Enrollment The screen
83. 1 Changed reader setting Reader 2 a 12 Sep 2003 16 14 22 Use Changed pchedule Undehnad Zchadula 1 12 Sap 2003 16 19 28 USER 1 Changed rchadula Undafined Schedule 1 i i2 Sep 2003 16 20 013 gini Changed rchedula tindafinad Schedule 1 ii 12 Sep 2003 14 21 27 usi i Changed reader ratting Raadar 5 12 i Sep 2005 146 21 951 wiki Changed reader catting Reader amp Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 23 8 2 To View System Log Panel Setup en 227 1 Click on the Audit Log on any of the Panel Setup page and the following page will be shown Panel Admin Panel Setup Network Settings input Point Configuration nal Set Date amp Time Auto Logout Timer fe Audit Log i2 Default Settings en Card Format e Company Profile c3 Email sM configuration O User Log From Day Month Tear To Day Month Year Name All Names system Log 2 Select the radio button for the System Log as shown above 3 Click on the button to request Access Easy for Master to enquiry for the report 4 The following is a sample of the System Log Selection Criteria for Audit Log system Log Fridey 23 Dec 2005 15 35 07 Product Mame Hardware Address MAC Internet Addresz Last Boot Time Current Boot Time Last Backup Time to Flash Mo of Convertors Exist Convertor 1 Convertor amp 3 SIM serial number Selection Criteria for
84. 5ec Open Open Folder Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 120 en Database Backup 14 2 Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller How To Restore System Database To activate Database Backup click on Database Backup from the Left Pane A screen as shown below appears Database fackua Database Restore System Database Backup Save a backup copy of current system database ta your PC 1 Click on the Database Restore link at the top right corner of the page and the Database Restore page will appear as shown below Database estore D Database MIN System Database Restore Browse Restore backup copy of system database to the Server da 2 Click on the Browse button to bring up the Choose File dialogue box as shown below Choose file Ei ES Look in EZ Desktop zj gs g ei E My Computer Adobe Reader 6 0 g Dscr at My Documents card csv iig Decr Fa Network Neighborhood JH Coder2 exe Em dbl el Wirz ip Rl cuteprinter exe A Lotu T Central AXS Hw Pics F Cygwin Es M apt PV Database R3 Pro pies sii uss Files of type All Files Cancel s 3 Chose the db tar gz file and click the Open button 4 Tostart the restore process click on the a button After successfully restoring the system database to the Access Easy Master you will need to re boot the Access Easy Master for the database to take effect NOTICE A Da
85. 7 23 Dec 2005 Reader 3 11 40 39 0 31 23 Dec 2005 Reader 2 11 40 36 Invalid Card Standard 26 bit Format invalid Second Card Read Card Humber 4 Invalid card Standard 26 bit Format 23 Dec 2005 Exit Danied Fassback 11 40 34 card Humber 23 Dec 2005 Reader 1 Invalid First Card Read 29 Card Number 29 Invalid Card Standerd 26 bit Format Invalid Card 11 40 06 Standard 26 bit Format 1 11 40 03 0 30 Standard 26 bit Format 1 23 Dec 2005 Reader 4 Invalid Card 1i 3 03 0022 Standard 26 bit Format Left Pane The left pane displays the main menu items for ease of operation Those in bright yellow background are the Panel s menu group Right Pane The right pane displays the work area of the menu items selected Pane This presentation is standard throughout the entire Access Easy Master s pages 3 2 Main Menu Items The main menu items are shown on the Left Pane of each page Below explains each Access Easy Master main menu item in brief 3 2 1 Activity Activity allows the user to view the activities that have taken place in the system The sub menu items of Activity is View Activity View Activity View Activity shows transactions generated due to access control system control and alarm conditions The transactions are categorised into the following Alarm Valid Restore and Time Attendance User can view only a specific category as mentioned abo
86. 98 200 201 202 Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 20 20 1 20 1 1 20 1 2 21 21 1 21 1 1 22 22 1 22 1 1 22 1 2 22 143 22 2 22 2 1 23 23 1 23 2 29 2 1 29 9 23 9 1 23 4 23 4 1 293 9 29 9 4 29 9 2 293 99 23 6 23 6 1 23 6 2 294 23 7 1 23 8 23 8 1 23 8 2 24 24 1 24 1 1 25 25 1 29 2 Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Input Control To activate Input Control To control Arm Disarm an Input Point To control Arm Disarm the Alarm Zone Output Control To activate Output Control To control the Output Points Reset APB To activate Reset APB To reset APB based on Card Number wrt Reader All Readers To reset APB based on Name wrt Reader All Readers To reset APB by All Card numbers wrt Reader All Readers To generate a Print Preview of the report To generate APB Zones Report Panel Setup To activate Panel Setup Network Setting To Configure LAN 1 Network Setting Remote PC Addresses To edit Remote PC Addresses Email Server Setup Information To Configure the Email Server Setup Information Dial In IP Setup Information To edit the Dial In IP Settings Information Access Easy Master IP Address Settings for Access Easy for Master SMS Server Settings Information Set Date amp Time To activate Date amp Time Setting To set the Date amp Time Auto Logout Timer To activate Auto Logout Timer Audit Log To View the User Log To View System Log Use
87. A Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 236 en Dial in User ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller NOTICE Do NOT enter the Dial In User Name and Password it should be the normal login User ID and Password that you use to login the Access Easy for Master in a LAN environment 13 After successful log in to the Access Easy for Master you can now proceed with the nor mal operation as if you are in the office 25 2 Setting up Macintosh for Dial in The above steps pertain to PC For Mac OS please follow the steps as explained 1 Logon to Access Easy for Master From any window of Access Easy for Master click on users You will see a screen that displays the users On this screen click on the dial in user button as shown in the screen shot below Panel Admin Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Dial in User en 237 2 Next you will come to a screen which displays the dial in user name and password Enter the User name and password in the appropriate boxes Panel Ad min User Mame PPP Password ET Dial In Settings Humber of illegal password attempts Undefined Illegal attempts lockout duration a minutes 0 255 NOTICE CHANGE THE DEFAULT USER NAME AND PASSWORD AND SAVE THE NEW SETTINGS BY CLICKING ON SAVE BUTTON INDICATED BY FLOPPY ICON 3 The default user name and password has to be changed for security reasons Enter t
88. ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Software Manual BOSCH en Software Manua All rights reserved No part of this manual may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical photocopying recording or otherwise without the prior written permission of BOSCH SECURITY SYSTEMS This manual is provided pursuant to a license agreement containing restrictions on their use The manual contains valuable trade secrets and proprietary information of BOSCH SECURITY SYSTEMS and is protected by international copyright law It may not be copied or distributed to third parties or used in any manner not provided for in the said license agreement All software is provided AS IS The sole obligation of BOSCH SECURITY SYSTEMS shall be to make available all published modifications that correct program problems are published within one 1 year from the date of shipment The software is intended for use only with the hardware specified in this manual and in the absence of other software Concurrent use with other software or with hardware not speci fied may cause the program to function improperly or not at all BOSCH SECURITY SYSTEMS may not provide support for systems operating under such conditions All efforts have been made to ensure the accuracy of the contents of this manual The above notwithstanding BOSCH SECURITY SYSTEMS assume no responsibility for any errors in this manual or
89. Address Name specified in this field will be used together with the Domain name to form the email address of the Access Easy for Master Referring to the diagram and with the Domain name bosch com sg the email address of Access Easy for Master becomes AEC bosch com sg 4 Click on the 999 button Dial In IP Setup Information This section allows user to configure the Dial In IP that is required for PPP protocol In order to have remote access ability using a modem for connection a temporary IP address has to be issued to the incoming connection When a user dialled in from home using his PC and a modem the Access Easy Controller s modem will answer the incoming call and negotiate with the remote modem for a suitable connection protocol and speed If the process is successful a temporary IP is issued to the remote modem and hence connection is established By default this Dial in IP address is set at 10 1 1 2 It will work fine on most network setup however if the user encounters connection problem it will need to be changed To change this setting click on the Dial In IP Settings to access to the setting page Panel Admin Panel Setup input Point Configuration amp Set Date amp Time Audit Log Default Settings y Erofil Gmail S65 configuration anel s IP Address 172 anels IP Netmack 2755 255 255 0 Fi Janel Gateway 172 Remote PC Address IP A PCN i 172 F 16 10 10
90. Audit Log Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Bosch Security Systems Pte Ltd 38C Jalan Peminpin Singapore 577180 AEC 5 6 37 27 2 OO 04 5F 80 36 A8 172 116 10 92 Wed Dec 21 19 15 31 SGT 2005 Fri Dac 23 15 16 19 SGOT 2005 Reader Ports 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 Reader IO 01 08 09 16 Reader Ports 03 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Reader IO 17 24 25 32 Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 228 en Panel Setup ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller The following table provides a brief explanation of the content of the System Log Items on the report Explanation Product Name Version number of the Access Easy for Master Hardware Address This is the mac address of the Access Easy controller it is the physi MAC cal address This information could be used in the ARP command to set the IP address of the Access easy controller Last Boot Time This indicates the previous time that the controller was rebooted via DT i e Current Boot Time This indicates the most recent time that the controller was rebooted via the Reboot link The next reboot using the Reboot link will shift this information to the Last Boot Time column Last Backup Time to This indicates the most recent time that the Database was backup Flash Database Backup could be done manually or automatically on a daily basis No of Converter s Shows how many Converter s card are connected to the CPU Converter amp n n This indicates the Readers Input and outputs that this
91. Cd Emai SMS Configuration e Email Server Settings vial In IP Settings cnc Settings e sms Server Settings anel s IP Address i72 16 1 0 58 Janel s IP Netmask 255 255 255 0 Janel s Gateway i72 16 e qu Remote PC Address IP Address PC Name 1 i72 16 1 0 1 remotehost i 129 2 NU 42 remotehost 2 3 129 2 10 43 remotehost 3 2s e kog E Sog aF CS L al t t File s for upgrading can be categorised as program enhancement bugs fixing new features etc For the flash update this is usually carried out when the Access Easy Controller s CPU Card flash memories become corrupted or that the CPU Card is out of service and needed replacement to resume normal operation This function will permanently overwrite your existing data in the flash memories Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Update Flash en 241 26 1 To activate Update Flash Since Update Flash is the first menu item of the Panel Maintenance group from the Home page click on Panel Maintenance or its icon button However if you are in other menu item page click directly on the Update Flash link 1 Panel Maintenance RS Update Flash List af Uploaded Files Delete All Files HleNames 70 LLL dE Upload File Click Start to proceed This will load software updates into the panel s flash memory NOTICE The uploading of db tar gz will replace all
92. Controller Manual Control en 29 Notice that the system resumes normal operation as according to Schedule at O830hrs and 1731hrs Now let us continue with Door Control 1 2 From the Access Easy Master main menu page click on Door Control 172 16 10 32 The Door Control screen will appear Panels All Panel Name Central Office 1 Main Entrance Side Entrance 3 R amp D Dept Entry Reader Production Dept Entry Reader Reader amp Reader 7 Reader 8 9 Reader 9 10 Reader 10 11 Reader 11 12 Reader 12 13 Reader 13 14 Reader 14 15 Reader 15 16 Reader 16 z 3 4 5 Reader 5 6 7 8 Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Alarmi Actiwillgs Location Date teaten Prodty Time Cardo 2 11 40 41 16 23 Dec 2005 Reader 3 Invalid Card 11 40 39 0 31 Standard 26 bet Format Access Denied Passback Card Number 1 23 Dec 2005 inel 1 Invalid Second Card Read 11 40 37 Card Nurmber a 23 Dec 2005 i 2 23 D Dec 2005 Reader 4 if 23 Der 2005 Reader 4 invalid Card Standard 26 bet Format Exit Denied Pa Passback Card Number Invalid Card Standard 26 bit Format Invalid Card standard 26 bit Format 23 Dee 2005 Sons 1 Iri alid First Card Read 2 11 40 33 29 Card Humber z5 z 23 Dec 2005 Reader Invalid Card 1 11 40 09 0 32 Standard 26 bit Format 20 23 Dec 2005 Reader 3 lavad Card 11 40 04 0 31 Standard 26 bit Format Locked Closed Lo
93. Controller How to test the GSM modem Software Manual ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 240 241 242 243 243 244 246 247 247 247 248 248 249 252 252 256 263 264 264 268 270 2 0 213 2 6 279 2 9 281 Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Before You Begin en 11 1 Before You Begin The Access Easy Master Software User Manual contains two detailed software setup informa tion they are P Access Easy Master Controller Software P Access Easy for Master Controller Software Access Easy Master Software is the main software that administers and controls all Access Easy Controllers whereas Access Easy for Master Software only supports minimal functions on its respective Access Easy Controller In this manual we will use the following terminologies to describe the following software Access Easy Master Controller Software Access Easy Master Access Easy For Master Controller Software Access Easy For Master Access Easy Controller Hardware Access Easy Controller This manual will describe the Access Easy Master Controller Software from Chapter 2 to 17 whereas Chapter 18 to 27 will describe the Access Easy for Master Controller Software Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 12 en Introduction to Access Easy Master ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 2 2 1 Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Introduction to Access Easy Master Access Ea
94. Controller Panels Admin en 149 16 4 2 How to generate a Print Preview of the Input Point Report Once you have completed configuring the Input Points a hardcopy can be printed out 1 From the first web page of the Input Setup click on the Inout Paint Report Iink A screen as shown below appears i Alarm Zone 1 Fa Alarm Zone 1 3 Alarm Zone 2 4 Motion Detector 4 Alarm Zone 2 5 Motion cbor Not Assigned 6 Undefined Input Point 6 Not Assigned T Undefined Input Point 7 Mot Assigned 8 Undefined Input Point amp Mot Assigned 3 Undefined Input Point 9 Mot Assigned 10 Undefined Input Point 10 Not Assigned lg Undefined Input Point 12 Not Assigned 13 Undefined Input Point 13 Not Assigned 14 Lndefined Input Point 14 Not Assigned 15 Undefined Input Point 15 Not Assigned 16 Undefined Input Point 16 Not Assigned 17 Undefined Input Point 17 Mot Assigned 18 Undefined Input Point 18 Mot Assigned 19 Undefined Input Point 19 Not Assigned 20 Undefined Input Point 20 Not Assigned 21 Undefined Input Point 21 Mot Assigned ge Undefined Input Point 22 Mot Assigned 2 Select the desired Input Point from the nput Description list If all Input Points are required select A Input Points 3 Click on the EJ shows a sample of the report button for a print preview of the report The following screen capture Return To Input Point Setup Return To Selection Criteria Bosch Security Systems Pte Ltd BC Jalan Peninpin Singapore 77180
95. Easy Master gives you complete flexibility of operating on these plat forms without any extra effort in setting up P Easy to install as Access Easy Master adopts the Plug n Play concept Simply connect a network cable from the Access Easy Master to a network hub follow by running a web browser program to set up the Access Easy Master and the system will be up and running in no time gt Easy to operate for end users as it uses the intuitive web interface that makes controlling or monitoring the system like performing Net surfing This also implies that minimum training is needed for installers distributors and end users gt Easy to access Access Easy Master from any computer or client that exists in your net work be it in a LAN or WAN configuration No longer are users required to have a dedi cated computer to handle the controller as any computer can now be used to access the Access Easy Master Such powerful feature allows users to save costs by fully optimising their existing resources and cutting down on any unnecessary spending on new hard ware gt Easy to maintain or upgrade the system as it is not dependent on any operating platform system to run on Upgrading the Access Easy Master does not require users to upgrade their computers and operating systems Likewise upgrading the operating system e g from Win 95 to Win 98 NT 2000 will not affect the Access Easy Master system configura tion Such investment produces long term c
96. Fill Profile iS becktving Files Address http 129 2 0 86 Port Q Download Options User name fo Se Password Q Cookies x Network Security Method Normal x Use proxy for local servers List the sites you want ta connect to directly bypassing the proxies set above Puta space or comma between each site 1279 20 41 Protocol Helpers Q Proxies J Site Passwords P E mail Q General ETUR 6 Enter the Access Easy for Master default IP Address into the box as shown above IP Addresses enter here will bypass the proxies and connect directly 7 Ifthe IP Address of the Access Easy for Master s has been assigned continue to enter the address in the field separate each Address by a space or a comma The screen cap ture shows the Default IP Address for Access Easy Controller and three assigned Access Easy for Master IP Addresses 129 2 0 45 129 2 0 44 and 129 3 0 80 129 2 0 41 129 2 0 45 129 2 D d4 129 5 0 80 8 Click on the OK button to close the dialog box With this settings done we can proceed to access the Access Easy for Master Now run the Web Browser program from Windows Macintosh Enter the Access Easy for Master default URL address as shown NOTICE As the current configuration has no connection to the network or modem accessing an Inter net address is not possible An error message will appear a sample of which is shown below Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA
97. IME CONFIG 7 Right click AnnounceFlags and select Modify Marne Type Data lab Default REG 57 value not set OxOO000005 5 i amp S EventLogFl Modify Binary Data OxO0000002 2 AY Frequency oxoo000004 4 amp W HoldPeriod Delete OxO0000005 5 RY LargePhase Rename Ox00136800 1280000 8 Enter 5 for Value data and click OK Edit DWORD Value Value name AnnounceFlags Value data Base Decimal Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 258 en APPENDIX E Setting up a Timeserver 9 Click Es start button and select Control Panel 47 Internet Internet Explorer e My Documents LJ My Recent Documents E mail a Outlook Express e Macromedia Dreamweaver Mz Microsoft word Lotus Motes Snagit 7 Set Program Access an Defaults Eoad comput Adobe Acrobat 5 0 accoun Command Prompt fi Se 9 Help and Support Search 1 adobe ImageReady 7 0 All Programs gt P Lag OFF o Shut Dawn fem 3 Windows Explorer 43 Microsoft Wort 10 Double click on Administrative Tools icon Addness Je Control Pansi fi Control Panel G Tath bo Category View Eh Anis Update 11 Double click on Services icon Bien A Adminesty ative Tools File and Folder Taska Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Ac
98. Ltd 38C Jalan Peninpin Singapore 577190 Schedules Report Thursday AXuy 26 2004 9 22 20 IM interval 1 Interval 2 Interval 3 Interval d Description Day Start End Start End Start End start End 1 Weekdays Schedule Sur eise seie sejles ceee eelan sejen oe Mom 08 30 12 30 13 15 17 30 0 c0 Tue us 30 12 30 13 15 17 30 i i T 4 ed 08 30 12 30 13 18 17 30 i i 0 6 i Thu nean 39 90 PEI 347 5 Russ kende aein Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Server Setup en 85 12 Server Setup Server Setup involves setting up the Access Easy Master and configuring its various parame ters These parameter includes Network Settings Auto Logout Timer Card Format View Activity Setting Company Profile Set Date and Time Default Settings Housekeeping Alarm Event Setup vvvvvvvvyv 12 1 Network Settings Network settings involve configuring the various network parameters for Access Easy Master such as IP address subnet mask and gateway It also involves setting up the Remote Clients IP address Click on Network Settings from the menu item list and you will see a screen as shown below Server IP Address 129 Server IP Netmask 255 255 n Server Gateway 129 2 fo 254 Remote Clients Address IP Address SEA EH e PC Name iflas fi fo fis PC Hamel ekis Be o Re PC Hane 3 129 2 f
99. Master Controller Panels Admin en 163 The timing diagram below gives a graphical description of the function Up Count Input Down Count Input Reset Output gt Output gt Max 1 z 3 5 1 z J 4 5 5 T a B 1L ipniibuib briidi inii i i Saa E cum EEE EEE EEE E Max Limit 5 Max Limit 10 eee ch cece grat pe JR In the timing diagram the basic operation of the function is outlined below Max Limit 5 and Pre Load 0 With the 2 defined parameters the Output gt Max will be driven high on the 5th pulse on the Up Count input However the Output gt 0 is driven high on the first pulse A Reset pulse clears both outputs to zero Max Limit 10 and Pre Load 5 With a Pre Load of 5 count the Output gt 0 is driven high This Output gt 0 will be cleared on the 5th pulse on the Down Count input A pulse on the Up Count input drives the Output gt 0O high again and the Output gt Max will be driven high on the 10th pulse 16 6 9 Exit Door This function is mainly used to monitor and control emergency exit doors Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Jer Request to Exit Door Strike Toggle dale Door Contact Door Forced Open Level ine OTF ED D ff E Lock Urlock Door Door Held Open Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 164 en Panels Admin ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Request to Exit Tog This input is edge triggered from O to 1 leading edge am
100. Master Controller Logging In And Understanding Access Easy Master Main Menu en 19 3 2 5 Server Setup Server Setup allows the user to configure the following settings Network Settings Set Date and Time Auto Logout Timer Default Settings Card Format Housekeeping View Activity Setting Alarm Event Setup Report Generation Report Generation allows the user to generate activity reports for particular date s and time based on Devices Cardholders and Events Database Backup Database Backup allows the user to save a backup of the database to the local hard disk and also allows the user to restore the database in the event of any controller failure Reboot Reboot allows the user to reboot the Access Easy Master from remote without having to be at the Access Easy Master itself Shutdown Shutdown allows the user to shutdown the system from remote without having to be at the Access Easy Master itself Logout Logout allows the user to do a proper exit from the Access Easy Master Panels Admin Panels Admin menu allows the user to administer the individual Access Easy Controller The sub menu items of Panels Admin are Access Groups Card Readers Input Setup Output Setup Advance I O Setup Input Point Configuration Email SMS Configuration and Reset APB Access Groups Access Groups allow the user to define a list of Readers which the cardholders can access within certain authorised time periods pre defined Schedule Card Reade
101. Mot Setup 10 Undefined Panel 10 Not Setup 11 Undefined Panel 11 Mot Setup i Undefined Panel 12 Not Setup alge Undefined Panel 13 Not Setup 14 Undefined Panel 14 Mot Setup 15 Undefined Panel 15 Mot Setup 16 Undefined Panel 16 Not Setup slits Undefined Panel 17 Not Setup 18 Undefined Panel 16 Not Setup 19 Undefined Panel 19 Not Setup 20 Undefined Panel 20 Mot Setup The maximum number of Access Easy Controller that Access Easy Master can support is 20 How to Add an Access Easy Controller Before the user proceeds with the following steps he should ensure that the Access Easy Master IP Address is also registered in the Access Easy Controller To register the Access Easy Master IP Address in the Access Easy Controller log in to the Access Easy Controller itself to register 1 Click on any of the undefined controller in this example Panel 3 is not configured yet and the following screen will appear Panel Setuja Panel Description Undef ined Panel 3 Panel IP Address E E E o j UE a r yor Ss 5 1 e Lu 5 T 2 Enter the Controller description and the Controller IP Address Click on the A icon to save your settings To delete a Controller click on the icon Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 72 en Panel Setup ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 3 Once the IP address of the new Access Easy Controller has been added to the Panel Setu
102. Point 24 Undefined Output Point 25 Undefined Output Point 26 Undefined Output Point 27 des en FS Fea rs e IS Poo Fale kale ke s IE Io e eo re knee ko roe 1 Click on the Output or Description text to proceed A screen as shown below appears Panel Admin Panel 3 Output Point Setup Output 1 Description Motion Detector 1 Simulator Duration a seconds 0 255 No Schedule I Disable transaction at Activity ES Ej 2 Delete the default text in the Description field and enter the new Description Delete the default entry for Duration and enter the new Duration see NOTICE below 4 By checking the box Disable transaction at Activity user can disable any of the 32 output points activity especially when they are activated by other type of function or elevator operation which don t require any logging NOTICE This setting for the Duration field is applicable for Manual Output Control refer to Output Con trol User can force the Output Point s to toggle its current state for the duration specified here User could also assign the Output Point as a Status Output for the Input Point How ever if the Duration field has a value other than O the Output Point will not remain on when the respective status is activated Instead it will turn on only for the duration as specified here Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 152 en Panels Admin ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller
103. Reader All Readers 1 Select the Readers from the list If you want to Reset APB with respect to all readers select All Readers 2 Click on the button to proceed If the command is executed successfully a mes sage indicating APB reset by all cards amp zones with respect to reader all readers will be displayed 3 Click on the Ge button to return To generate a Print Preview of the report The APB Zones report allows user to know which cardholder is in the APB Zone at the time of the preview Should there be a need to Reset APB for a particular cardholder the user can use this report to verify that the cardholder has actually violated the APB and not due to other condition such as an Expired Card Number To generate APB Zones Report This report shows who are the cardholders still in the APB zones When a cardholder enter an APB zone by opening a door from an APB entry reader he will be registered in the system as present in the APB zone governed by the APB entry reader Similarly when he exit the APB zone by opening a door from an APB exit reader he will be de registered in the system as been present in the APB zone governed by the APB exit reader 1 From the first web page of the Reset APB menu item click on the PB Zones Report ink Manual Control E Reset Anti Passback Eu APB Zone 2 Select the desired Zone from the list 3 Click on the shows an example of the report button for a p
104. Reqular Holiday 20 2 Click on the Reaular Holidays or amp Special Holidays link to list the appropriate holiday type 3 Click on the Holiday or the Description text to proceed A screen as shown below appears Global Yoliday wn Um ae q y e Regular Holiday 4 Holiday Description Undefined Regular Holiday 4 Current Holiday Date New Holiday Date Day x Manth zl vear zl Include year in pracessing C Yes No a aS Jr Pn Ar o xe L uu 4 Delete the default text and enter the new Holiday Description 5 Select the New Holiday Date from the list box for the Day Month and Year After it is selected and saved it will reflect on the Current Holiday Date 6 Ifthe Holiday date is fixed then click on the radio button of the Include year in process ing to No otherwise click Yes 7 Do one ofthe following Nu gt Toconfirm the entries click on the button This will cause the Access Easy Master to start replicating the changes to the rest of the Access Easy Controllers gt Toclear the entries click on the A button button gt To return to the first page click on the button Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Holidays en 77 8 Proceed to configure other Holiday dates where applicable The example below shows selection of Regular Holiday 1 used for Christmas in the year 2004 Since the date
105. Security Systems Pte Ltd Address 1 30C Jalan Pemimpin Address 2 Singapore 577180 For the information entered above the letterhead will appear as shown below Notice that Address 1 and Address 2 is automatically separated by a comma Company Nam e osch Security Systems Pte Ltd 38C Jalan Pemimpib iSingapore 577180 Address 1 Address 2 How to Edit the Department List User can configure the departments available in the company in the Department List User can then select the department that the cardholders belong to when doing card assignment Please refer to Chapter 5 Card Assignment The Card Parameters Card Details Department for the assignment of departments to cardholders To edit the Department List follow the steps below 1 From the Company Profile main page as shown below click on the Department List ink Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 92 en Server Setup ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Company Name Bosch Security Systems Pte Ltd Address 1 30C Jalan Pemimpin Address 2 Singapore 557180 E3 2 The screen as shown below appears Company Profile Sales Dept Purchasing Dept Engineering Dept Marketing Dept Production Dept Undefined Department 10 Undefined Department 11 hed Luspartmern 3 Undefined Department 15 Undefined Department 16 Undefined Department 17 i i 4 5 6 ri H g i ii iz 3 i4
106. Settings How to Edit the User Definable Fields How to Edit the Facility Code How to Edit the Date Format How to Edit the Time Format Housekeeping Software Manual ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 61 62 65 65 66 67 68 68 69 70 T1 71 12 13 75 76 f 79 80 81 83 85 85 86 86 86 86 8 90 90 90 91 91 93 93 95 95 96 96 96 96 Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 12 8 1 12 8 2 12 9 12 9 1 12 9 2 12 9 3 13 13 1 13 2 13 3 13 4 13 4 1 13 4 2 14 14 1 14 2 15 15 1 15 2 1553 16 16 1 16 2 16 2 1 16 2 2 16 3 16 3 1 16 3 2 16 3 3 16 3 4 16 3 5 16 3 6 16 3 7 16 3 8 16 3 9 16 3 10 16 4 16 4 1 16 4 2 16 5 16 5 1 16 6 16 6 1 16 6 2 Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd How to Use the Manual Housekeep How to Use the Auto Housekeep Alarm Event Setup Alarm Priority Setup Alarm Event Condition Setup Alarm Instruction Message setup Report Generation How to Set Criteria for Report Generation How to Save Criteria for Future Use How to Generate Report Using Saved Criteria How To Generate Audit Log Report User Log System Log Database Backup How to Perform Database Backup How To Restore System Database Reboot Shutdown and Logout Reboot Function Shutdown Function Logout Function Panels Admin How To Choose Individual Panel To Admin How to Setup Access Groups How to Configure Edit Access Group parameters
107. These panels work stand alone but shared a common GSM adapter which is attached to a dedicated Access Easy Controller serial com port Access EY Controller Access Easy Controller Pocass Easy Controller ee 015 NT Pecess Easy Controller chy The Access Easy Controller 1 has the GSM adapter connected to it s serial com port hence it is also acting as a SMS Server to help relay the other Access Easy Controllers messages to the Service Provider Whenever there is any SMS message that needed to be send the respective Access Easy Con troller will send the SMS messages over to the Access Easy Controller SMS Server and the SMS Server will send via the GSM adapter to the Service Provider These panels are said to be acting as the SMS Client Hence there is a need to control which is the IP Address that is allowed to send SMS this is to prevent unauthorised personnel sending SMS via your Access Easy Controller Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 178 en Panels Admin ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller NOTICE Please ensure that GSM adapter baudrate is configure at 115200bps 8bit data 1 stop bit and no parity settings Please refer to the Appendix Gfor details To Configure Access Easy Controller as a SMS Server By default the SMS Server IP address is blank If this panel is attached to a GSM adapter you will need to configure the IP address of other Access Easy Controllers that will send SMS mes s
108. a single email address hence not able to send out the mail to the recipients Send To Configuration Email To edit the Send To Configuration for Email 1 Click on the Group or the Description text to proceed Ga Message Devices carch olders amp Events e steness Report Send To Email SM Group 1 Description System Admin Group To userGbosch com Ti Co wserl bosch cos 2 Click on the SMS hyperlink The screen as shown below appears Highlight the default text and enter a Description for the Group 4 Enter the email address in the appropriate field 5 Click on the 999 button Send To Configuration SMS To edit the Send To Configuration SMS 1 Click on the Group or the Description text to proceed EP el Message e Devices e Cardholders E Events a Lateness Report Send To Email Group E 1 Description System Admin Group Ta usersbosch com Ta Cc weerl bosch com 2 From the screen above click on the SMS link to configure the Send To Configuration for SMS The screen as shown below appears LISTO Devices cacholders Quos isteness Kevort Emall SMS Configuration Send To SHS Email Group i Description System Admin Group 1 Mobile Device 1 Mobile Device z Mabil amp Device 3 Mobile Device 4 4 E Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 170 en Panels Admin 16 8 2 16 8 3 Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 ALLPLEX Access Ea
109. ader control to follow the input such as physical input physical output link criteria or schedule Input Output Description Input source The input will be linked to the output directly Toggle It is edge triggered from O to 1 leading edge Output The output is a direct link of the input Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 166 en Panels Admin ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 16 7 Input Point Configuration The state of each Input point must be closed in order for the Access Easy Controller to treat it as normal state However there are some devices whereby its normal state is open thus rep resenting an activated alarm state When such devices are connected to these Input points without inverting an input s to the normal state it would cause unexpected or false alarm In simple term this configuration allows user to inverts the logical state of the input that is seen by the Access Easy Controller thus allowing such devices to be used Access Easy Controller allows all the Input Points to be inverted except those assigned to Exit Readers and Arm Disarm Readers In this section users can also select the Input Point to be in 2 State Non Supervised 2 State Supervised or 4 State Supervised monitoring state 16 7 1 To activate Input Point Configuration To configure the Input Point Configuration select the target Access Easy Controller and click on the nput Point Configuration hype
110. age If the administrator chooses to enrol a card of unknown proprietary wiegand card format using the web page he should follow the steps below 1 To goto the page as shown below select Card Assignment from the Left Pane followed by Batch Cards Psteh Cards F at the top right corner and lastly select Go to Cards Enrolment S to Cards Enrollment The screen as shown below will appear Go to Batch Cards Cards Enrollment Reader Reader 1 wv Card X Auto Assignment Name Access Level Please select an Access Level Details List of scanned cards Add Options Copy From Global Card Facility Code l Card Farmat BOSCH amp DC Proprietary Format Automatically replace existing cardis with default reference card information Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 58 en Card Assignment ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Select a Reader to be the enrolment Reader In this example we select Reader 1 to be the enrolment Reader 2 Click on the button to activate the selected Reader as the enrolment Reader 3 Present the card with unknown Wiegand Format to the enrolment Reader which is Reader 1 in this example The card that has been presented to the enrolment Reader will appear in the box for List of scanned cards as shown in the screen below m d F Cards Enrollment Reader Reader 1 v Card Auto Assignment Name Access Le
111. age through it 1 To change this setting click on the ms Server Settinas link The screen as shown below appears Panel Admin Panel Setup 1 Email fses Confiquratian GSM Modem Connected Yes CO Ne Remote Panel Address Li IP A amp 5 AEC Panel Hane 1 oo fo oa Cc 2 oS UE QUUEGIO IG E Tau j amp a a a c a C 2 By default the radio button for GSM Modem Connected is selected as Yes 3 There are up to 10 Remote Panel addresses that you could configure These addresses are the IP Address of the Access Easy Controllers that send SMS messages via the SMS Server 4 After the IP addresses are configured click on the button 5 You will need to reboot the Access Easy Controller for the changes to take effect NOTICE To allow the Access Easy Controller that is acting as the SMS Server to send SMS message its IP address has to be included in the list as well Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Panels Admin en 179 To Configure Access Easy Controller as a SMS Client By default the SMS Server IP address is blank If this panel is not attached to a GSM adapter itis a SMS Client and hence need to identify the IP Address of the SMS Server 1 To change this setting click on the SMS server Settings ink The screen as shown below appears Panel Admin Panel Setup
112. ain Menu en 21 Puen Pe The previous button has similar function as the next button P It saves the setting made on the current screen and gt It brings up the previous screen The reset button provides the following functions gt It is use to reset APB violation P It is use to clear the field in the Holiday date setting The cancel button abort changes and revert to previously saved set tings Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 22 en Activity 4 4 1 Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Activity Each activity transaction such as Door Forced Open Door Held Open etc is captured by Access Easy Master and displayed on the View Activity web page in real time mode according to the transaction occurrence date and time The activity transactions are categorised into 4 groups They are P Alarm Activity P Valid Activity gt Restore Activity and P Time Attendance Please refer to Appendix C Activity Transactions for the activity transactions in the different groups View Activity On the web page user is given the option to view one of the following Alarm Transactions Valid and Alarm Transactions Restore and Alarm Transactions Time Attendance or vvvvv All Transactions The number of records to view on screen is configurable by the user up to a maximum of 70 records see NOTICE Please refer to Chapter 12 Server Setup V
113. al PC How to Save Criteria for Future Use Criteria created in the previous section can be saved in the Access Easy Master for future use This is very helpful when the user needs to generate daily weekly or monthly reports By sav ing the criteria the user need not re configure the selections Instead he could just call out the criteria that has been saved previously and generate the report with new Date and Time settings Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 114 en Report Generation ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller The following step shows you how to save the criteria in the Access Easy Master iai 1 After configuration the criteria click on the to save the criteria The following screen shows the Save Criteria page Activity Report Generation List of Criteriaz Save As al 2 Type aname in the Save As textbox and click on the button 13 3 How to Generate Report Using Saved Criteria To generate reports using previously saved criteria you will need to load the criteria from the Access Easy Master 1 From the Report Generation page click on Load Criteria at the top right corner of the page and the Activity Report Generation screen will appear as shown below Aotivity Report Generation List of Criterias e ll ae r omo woo e CM go ww 2 You could now select the criteria from the List of Criterias Activity Report Generation List of Criteriaz List of Cri teries 0007 R amp D
114. always fall on the December 25th the nclude year in processing was set to No Global Holidays Regular Holiday 1 Holiday Description Christmas Current Holiday Date 25 Dec New Holiday Date Day 25 Month Dec Year Include year in processing Yes No The year Is not taken into consideration 10 2 How to Generate a Holidays Report Once you have completed configuring the required Holidays a hardcopy can be printed out To print any one or all Holidays Regular or Special configuration follow the steps below 1 From the first page of either the Regular or Special Holidays click on the link Holidays Report The example below shows the Regular Holidays Report generation Holiday Report Generation Regular Holidays Report Available holidays Selected list of Holidays r Ja T o cem ia ig SA FS L a LI M 2 Select the desired Holiday from the list box and it will appear on the Selected list of Holi days box as shown below If no Holiday is selected from the list all the available Holidays with date settings will be included in the report Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 78 en Holidays Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Holiday Report Generation Regular Holidays Report avallable holidayvodes Selected list of Holidays 3 To remove the selected holiday from the Selected list of Holi
115. an Alarm condition Arm Disarm Status Turns ON when it is Armed Ready Status Turns ON when the Input Point is not in the normal condition It is said to be Not Ready for Arming Bypass Status Turns ON when the Input Point is Bypassed Any alarm detected by any of the Input Points would also trigger the Common Alarm Output relay at address 8 and is only restored when all the Input Points is restored back to Normal state NOTICE 1 The Input Control web page will display the status of the Alarm Zones as well as the sta tus of individual Input Points Please refer to Chapter 5 Manual Control Input Control for detail 2 All Input Points configured to an Alarm Zone follow the First Input Point s setting for Arm Delay Alarm Delay and Schedule of that Zone Before we start here is a brief description of how the Access Easy Controller interprets the Schedule Intervals for Input Points arming and disarming statuses For example If the setting for Schedule 2 is Interval 1Start O830hrsEnd 1730hrs Interval 2 3 and 4 has no setting When the Schedule 2 is tied to Input Point 1 the input point will arm and disarm accord ingly Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 146 en Panels Admin ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Bahr O830hrs 1Falhrs z358hrz Input Point 1 Nm P mes EE arr Take note that the Input Point is disarmed at exactly O830hrs but re armed at 1731hrs a min u
116. appear It shows the Alarm activities This is the default page for View Activity To include Valid transactions on the View Activity click B valid The screen will refresh and show the Valid and Alarm activities Panels A11 zd alarm B valid B Restore All CD Time attendance View fctivity Alarm amp Valid Activities Disconnected 13 Jul 2004 R amp D Dept Entry Reader Access Denied 12 04 05 31 Albert 1 13 Jul 2004 Main Entrance Door Held Open u Bea aS LS 9 Kent 1 13Jul 2004 Main Entrance Access Granted 12 03 38 UE Kent 1 13 Jul 2004 Production Dept Entry Reader Access Granted 12 03 29 26 Vincent Lim 1 13 Jul z 04 R amp D Dept Entry Reader Access Denied Td PUE Lawrence 1 13 Jul 2004 Side Entrance Access Granted reUa EL 2D Mary 13 Jul 2004 Production Dept Entry Reader Access Granted 12 02 53 ed Micheal 2 8 9 Feed moa m orm Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Activity en 25 3 To include Restored transactions on the View Activity click B estore The screen will refresh and show the Restored and Alarm activities Panels 411 alarm B valid Restore al Time Attendance Restore amp Alarm Activities i nme fFfadNo WUserName 1 13 Jul 2004 Side Entrance Door Held Open 111534237 11856 Card Number 11856 1 13 Jul 2004 11 41 22 1 13 Jul 2004 11 41 22 4 To show All activities click
117. arm Zone Input Points can be grouped together if they are to be Armed Disarmed together This forms a group which is known as Alarm Zone In each of the Access Easy Controller it allows up to 4 Alarm Zones These Alarm Zones can be Armed Disarmed by means of Arm Disarm Readers or from the nput Control screen Access Easy Master consolidates all the Alarm Zones from each individual Access Easy Controller that it is managing in a single screen User could Arm Disarm any Alarm Zone directly from this screen The following screen shows an example of the nput Control screen with Alarm Zone 1 and Alarm Zone 2 from a Access Easy Controller called Cen tral Office Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Manual Control en 37 5 3 Input Control i Alarm Zone 1 Panels Central Office amp Alarm Fone 2 E i Panel Name Central Offi MEME LK cg ma Alarm Zone 17 B 1 Motion Detector 1 Dirzarmed Low 2 Motion Detector Disarmed Low Alarm Zone 2 See E 3 Motion Detector 3 Disarmed Low 4 Motion Detector 4 Dizarmed Low 5 Motion Detector 5 Disarmed Low Mo Change C Arm Now amp Undefined Input Point 6 Disarmed Low f Mo Change C Arm Now 7 Undefined Input Point 7 Disarmed Low Mo Change C Arm Now 8 Undefined Input Point 8 Disarmed Low f Mo Change C Arm Now 9 Undefined Input Point 9 Disarmed Low f No Change C Arm Now 10 Undefined Input Point 10 Disarmed Low f Mo Change C
118. at you use to login the Access Easy for Master in a LAN environment 8 After successful log in to the Access Easy for Master you can now proceed with the nor mal operation as if you are in the office Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 240 en Update Flash ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 26 Update Flash This function allows Access Easy for Master parameters update to the flash to be carried out merely by a few clicks of the mouse button User can easily use a simple ftp program using third party program to transfer file s either from Bosch Security Systems web site or BOSCH SECURITY SYSTEMS dealers to a designated location in Access Easy for Master directory initi ate the Update Flash and allow the Access Easy for Master software to install the program update the flash automatically NOTICE 1 Please check with BOSCH SECURITY SYSTEMS or its authorised dealers for the upgrade 2 Before attempting to ftp to the Access Easy for Master the Remote PC IP needs to be configured first in the Panel Setup else the panel will not allows connection Goes to the Panel Setup of the Access Easy for Master and configure into any of the 3 remote PC set ting the PC s IP address that you intend to use for Panel Admin Panel Setup e Metwark Settings input Point Configuration x Set Date amp Time Auto Logout Timer en Audit Lag er Default Settings ee Card Farmat er Company Profile
119. ated only from the Left Pane menu item From any menu item page click on the Logout link from the Left Pane The web browser will logout immediately without any prompt To login again refer to Chapter 3 Logging In and Understanding Access Easy Master Main Menu Logging Into Access Easy Master Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Panels Admin en 123 16 16 1 Panels Admin Panels Admin refers to the administration and configuration of individual Access Easy Control ler which are currently connected to the Access Easy Master Under Panels Admin menu of the Access Easy Master main menu you will see the various parameters to configure for each individual Access Easy Controller such as Access Groups Card Readers Input Setup Output Setup Advance I O Setup Input Point Configuration Email SMS Configuration and Reset Anti Passback settings Panels Admin provides the Server Administrator the convenience of centrally accessing and configuring individual Access Easy Controllers that are currently having a connection with it How To Choose Individual Panel To Admin The Access Easy Master is able to detect which Access Easy Controller are setup and Panels that are currently having a connection to it For Panels that are off line due to network prob lem they will still be shown in the list of Panels in Panels Admin Their settings can still be changed and when the Panels are connected the ne
120. atically lock back after work A screen of the Scheduling Options page is shown in the section Reader Options Unlock door For Entry Reader Entry and Arm Disarm Reader When this mode is selected the door that is controlled by the particular reader is permanently unlocked There is free access to everyone This function is applicable to Entry Reader and Entry and Arm Disarm Reader C Unlock door For Elevator Reader this function is replaced by a similar function Disable Elevator Reader in the below section Disable Elevator Reader For Elevator Reader Only When this mode is selected the elevator that is controlled by the particular reader is perma nently unlocked There is free access to everyone This function is applicable to Elevator Disable Eleyator Reader Reader only C For Entry Reader and Entry and Arm Disarm Reader it is replaced by a similar function Unlock door in the above section Schedules will not be used to unlock this door When this mode is selected the reader access mode will be activated Gaining access will require the user to present his her card and PIN code if PIN code is required Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Panels Admin en 133 Schedules will be used to unlock this door When this mode is selected the Reader access mode will function based on the Schedule intervals setting To set the scheduling options refer to the sec
121. ave the same entries as Monday a 2 a Lx mn gom t a Sefer p gt te rejat Seles 31313130 94 Special Hol in 24 hour 4 digits format 8 Repeat step 7 until all applicable entries are entered Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Schedules en 83 11 3 gt Tocancel the operation click on the SS P Toreturn to the first page click on the button 11 Proceed to edit the other DOW or Holiday where applicable If the company does not If the time of operation is the same for Monday to Friday click on the Copy To check boxes to indicate a tick mark This will duplicate the setting to other DOW Regular Hol or Special Hol as shown below To de select the DOW click on it again Schedule 1 Schedule Description Schedule 1 ke Start End Start End Start End Start End Sunday or 7 oon ae a ire Saal w deel EU wm zm ari mm nur Monday os 30 i2 30 fis fis fiz se 3 d T d4 d Tuasday f ee apn E Ee Tite L pai uy epus Wadnasay id To copy the entries in Monday field to other DOW pul d In this case Tuesday to Friday will have the same iio Friday 4 entries as Monday tpe Saturday LE O l Regular Hol i u D j p EX 1 Special Hol ie oo spee cnm i P000 0m 0 ce 10 Do one of the following gt Toconfirm the entries click on t
122. aving it as O will cause the Output Relays to remain on till the Status has changed Please refer to the section on Output Setup below for more details _ 9 Click on the button see NOTICE1 2 and 3 NOTICE _ 1 Activating the button will cause all active Armed Input Points within the Alarm Zone to be set to default i e Disarmed 2 Activating the button outside the pre defined Schedule intervals will cause the Input Point to be Armed 3 When an Alarm Zone is also armed disarmed by Schedule the condition similar to NOTICE 2 has the priority over NOTICE 1 Proceed to configure other Input Points by clicking on the button to return to main page 16 4 1 Alarm Zone Description The Alarm Zone Description allows the user to change the description for each Alarm Zone to the description he prefers so that he may better visualize the location of the alarm zone From the first web page of the Input Setup click on the arm Zone Description jink A screen as shown below appears Panel Admin Panel 3 Input Point Setup Alarm Zone 1 Alarm Zone 1 Alarm Zone2 Alarm Zone 2 Alarm Zone3 Alarm Zone 3 Alarm Zone 4 Alarm Zone 4 tg i L 1 Tochange the Alarm Zone Description for each Alarm Zone delete the default description from each Alarm Zone and enter the new description accordingly Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master
123. ber Eore Even Parity bit Dara Odd Parity bit B or b Blank OX Farity bit Location 0 Binary O 1 Binary 1 2 Delete the default text and enter a Description for this Card Format Enter the card format for the Card Encoded Format field accordingly 4 Enter the parity for Parity Format 1 and Parity Format 2 please apply the condition in NOTICE 1 here and for subsequent Parity Format fields NOTICE 1 The entries to this field must not contain Parity Bit Location that depends on the resul tant Parity Bit of the next or higher Parity Format 2 to 8 Parity Format field entries EP 2 If the Card Format doesn t support Parity checking leave the All Parity Format fields blank In order to understand how to configure the different format the standard 26 Bit Wiegand card format will be used as an example Example 26 Bit Wiegand Card Format The 26 bits of transmission from the Reader to the Access Easy Controller consists of two par ity bits and 24 code bits The first transmitted bit is the Even parity bit E and it is calculated over the first 12 bits The last bit transmitted is the Odd parity O and it is calculated over the last 12 bits The string of bits for this code format is shown in the following tables Due to the lack of space the 26 Bits is split into two separate rows of 13 each Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 88 en Server Setup Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 ALLPLEX Access Easy Maste
124. cally relock NOTICE If you Momentarily Unlock a door you will not be able to see the true status Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Manual Control en 33 5 2 Input Control Input control allows us to check the status of all the input points and whether they are assigned to specific Alarm Zones and to send a command to manually Arm Disarm the input point or zone As this is a manual control it has priority over the controls set by the system However the system will take over once it encounters a valid Schedule Devices that are usually monitored by input points are motion detectors skylights and tem perature sensors Besides monitoring the status of these input sensors the Input Control screen provides an easy way for the user to arm and disarm these alarm points Disarming an alarm point is the same as turning it off When an input point is disarmed it no longer reports alarms to the Activity screen Arming an alarm point means that you are turning it back on When an input point is armed monitoring of that point is re enabled and events from the point will once again be reported to the Activity screen For configuration of system control please refer to Panels Admin Input Setup Before we begin we show an example to illustrate the operational behaviour The setting for Interval 1 is Start O830hrs and End 1730hrs Interval 2 3 and 4 has no setting S
125. ce Reader 5 Office Reader 7 Office Reader 8 Office Reader M Office Reader 1 0 The Available I O Points list box contains all the Input Points and Output Points that are avail able in the entire system Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Server Setup en 103 Available I 0 Points available TO Points Central Office Motion Detector 1 Central Office Motion Detector 2 Central Office Motion Detector 3 Central Office Motion Detector 4 Central Office Motion Detector 5 Central Office Undefined Input Point 6 Central Office Undefined Input Point Central Office Undefined Input Point 8 Central Office Undefined Input J Undefined 1 Central Office Input Choose the desired Readers Input Points or Output Points to be added to the Selected List of Locations by clicking on the description of the device For this example R amp D Dept Entry Reader is selected as shown above f After selecting all the devices to be included in the Selected List of Location the next step is to select the relevant Alarm Instruction Message that you would like the user to see when they acknowledge the alarm The Alarm Instruction list box provides a list of available messages that you could select Alarm Instruction for F amp D Alarm Instruction for R amp D Undefined Alarm Instruction Undefined Alarm Instruction Undefined A
126. cess If this mode is selected it means that after 2 cards are presented to the same Reader to unlock the door the Reader will switch back to single card access An example of the scenario would be as follows In the morning 2 authorized personnel with dual card function have to present their card at the high security door Reader before the door can be accessed normally Subsequently the rest of the employees would access the door using their own card At the end of the day either of the 2 authorized personnel holding the dual card will have to revert the system back to dual card mode by pressing the 3 key on the Keypad before presenting their cards Dual Card access at all time If this mode is selected it means that 2 cards have to be presented to the Reader at all times to unlock the door This mode works in conjunction with the Dual Card Assignment under the chapter Card Assignment as to whether there is any order in the presentation of cards Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 144 en Panels Admin ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 16 3 10 How to generate a Print Preview of the Card Reader Report Once you have completed configuring the Card Readers a hardcopy can be printed out 1 From the first web page of the Card Readers menu item click on the Card Reader Report link A screen as shown below appears Panel Admin Fanel 3 Card Readers Reader Description All Readers
127. cess Easy Master Controller 12 Scroll down to Windows Time gt Services Local Windows Tinie Mame zoripkk Tahun Pia Task Shader Enables 4 Started shag the service GTO MetBIOS Hel Enables su Stated Restart the parya Bs Te Provides T fa Telnet Enables ar aaa ia Terminal Services Allows mut Started Tr ordre eredi een Powru Started Tf this service is stopped dabe and tme synchronization wil be unawallsble IF this Gis uneverca Mugand Provides s service Hs disabled amy services that iy volume Shadow Copy Manages a ecpbcitly depend on i vll Fal bo start aw bes Wi Started iy winidoees Adeo Mugugesd Started By Windowrs Firewallfin Provides nm Started Paitin d 13 Select Stop the service zi Services Local Windows Time Stop the service Restart the service Pat Hisa Disblad Hisa 14 Once service is stop click Start the service u Services Local Windows Time Start the service 15 Reboot PC Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual jg con As bacal Sahara Local Service Local Sysbem Local Syshem Local System Local System Local Service Local Service Local Sysbem Local Servia Local Sysbem Local Swsbem APPENDIX E Setting up a Timeserver en 259 Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 260 en APPENDIX E Setting up a Timeserver ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller NOTICE If user is using windows XP professional with service pack 2 for t
128. chedule x Interval 1 DO 0830 1730 2359 Alarm Zone Status am are Nm Armed Disarmed Schedule S a N Armed Manual Input 1 Disarm Zone at 07 3l 3 Arm Zane at 123l Control command 2 Arm Zone at 0800 4 Disarm Zone at 1315 sent DO 0830 1730 2389 Resultant Alarm SS SS WS Zone Status SS S NN SS S SS nsa gSO 1230 1315 Legend AIM lipyt Polit wirt Ik the tam Zore are DieA med AU lipirt Pole wti i the Aam Zone are Amed P Notice that the system resumes normal operation as according to Schedule at 0830hrs and 1731hrs Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 34 en Manual Control Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Now we are ready to control the Input Points ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 1 From the Access Easy Master main menu page click on nput Control ee eT EEESEDSNQUUy Ud eee 23 Dec 2005 Reader 2 Access Denied Pontii 11 40 41 16 Card Number 10 e 1 11 4 0 05 0 32 Standard 26 bit Format a 11 40 06 0 31 Standard 26 bit Format 172 16 10 32 20 n 1 2 The nput Control screen will appear Panels ALL Janel Name Central Office Alarm Zone 1 1 Motion Detector 1 2 Motion Detector 2 Marm Zone 2 Motion Detector 3 Motion Detector 4 eb E E 0 9 Motion Detector 5 Undefined Input Point amp Undefined Input Point 7 Undefined Input Point 8 Undefined Input Point 9 10 undefined Input Point 10 11 Undefined Input Point 11 12 Undefine
129. cked Closed Locked Closed Locked Closed Unlocked Closed Unlocked Closed Unlocked Closed Unlocked Closed Unlocked Closed Unlocked Closed Unlocked Closed Unlocked Closed Unlocked Closed Unlocked Closed Unlocked Closed Unlocked Closed No Change Unlock Na Change C Unlock No Change Unlock No Change Unlock No Change Lock Wo Change Lock No Change C Lock No Change Lock Na Change Lock Na Change Lock No Change C Lock No Change Lock No Change 7 Lock No Change Lock Na Change Lock No Change Lock Software Manual Selection of Panels to control C Momentanly Unlock C Momentarily Unlock C Momentarily Unlock Momentarily Unlock C Momentanly Unlock C Momentarily Unlock C Momentarily Unlock Momentarily Unlock C Momentarily Unlock C Momentanly Unlock C Momentarily Unlock C Momentarily Unlock C Momentarily Unlock C Momentarily Unlock C Momentanly Unlock C Momentarily Unlock Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 30 en Manual Control 5 1 1 Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Description provides the Controller Name and the Door Readers allocated to it Current Status column provides us with the current door status whether the door is Locked Closed Locked Opened Unlocked Closed or Unlocked Opened Manual Actions will allow us to manually Unlock the door if it is Locked an
130. comes with the Modem 4 Please run the HyperTerminal program from the Windows Go to Program Accessories Communication HyperTerminal 5 You will be prompted to enter the name of the connection please enter any name Lonnection Description 2 x hp Hew Connection Enter a name and choose an icon Far the cannectian M ame E Icon Cancel 6 Select the COM port that the GSM Modem is connected to D asda Enter details Far the phone number that vau want to dial Count regiory Singapore 55 Area cade Phone number Connect using Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 280 en APPENDIX G T ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Click OK and you will go to the screen to set the Baudrate set it to to 115200bps 8bit data 1 stop bit and no parity Fort Settings Bits per second 115200 Data bits le Parity Mone Stop bits fi Flow control Id faTaT Restore Defaults 8 Click OK button to start the connection NOTICE Once connected you should check whether the connection is stable by typing AT follow by enter you should get an OK reply from the GMS modem If there is no reply or the reply is not OK but display some unknown character then it is pos sible that the GSM Modem baudrate is incorrect Change the baudrate and reconnect 9 10 11 12 13
131. configured email addresses Reset APB Reset APB allows the user to reset the Anti Passback APB feature once it is violated Usage of the Buttons Another important part to understand is the meaning of the buttons The buttons that appear at the bottom of each screen can be explained as follows eea e NENNEN The save button saves the current settings to the Dynamic RAM DRAM and refreshes the current web page The add button provides the following functions P It carries out the addition process during a batch card opera tion P It also adds a selected parameter to a list window The delete button provides the following functions P It deletes all configurable parameters and set it to default P It also removes a selected parameter from the list window The next button provides the following functions gt It saves the setting made on the current screen and P It brings up the next screen The list button provides a few function gt It allows you to go back to the first web page of a menu item P It can also be use in place of the cancel button to abort changes However condition applies that none of the other but tons namely the next prev or save is clicked prior to this gt In report generation the list button is used to obtain a print preview of the report Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Logging In And Understanding Access Easy Master M
132. correct IP address before you proceed any further We will guide you in the following steps to configure a typical Macintosh s IP address to 129 2 0 40 Follow through the procedures to set the IP Address for the Macintosh 1 Click on the Apple icon to show a list of control function 2 Select Control Panels TCP IP The TCP IP dialog box appears File Edit Uiew Special Help About This Computer acis Bammm 9 Apple System Profiler Appearance AppleCO Audio Player Apple Menu Options Cj Automated Tasks AppleTalk E Calculator Colorsyne Chooser Configuration Manager Control Panels Ld Foris sm i Date amp Time Tj Favorites BialRssist I Faustatus EdilCDeu Graphing Calculator Ch Internet Access Jigsaw Puzzle Energy Saver Extensions Manager File Exchange 4 Key Caps File Sharing E Memory Df General Controls Network Browser shel Note Pad Jele f Launcher Gi Recent Applications H Location Manager Cj Recent Documents H MaclinkPlus Setup CW gj Recent Servers Memory rf Remate Access Status Menuscript f Scrapbook MenuScript PPC Pad em seriei Monitors Sound MOUSE de Stickies Numbars POFWriter Shortcut QuickTime Settings Remote Access Speech Startup Disk TEP IF Teult F Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller How to Configure the Access Easy Master IP Address en 191 TCP IP ADC Office Connect wia Ethernet Setup C
133. creen below Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Card Assignment en 61 6 4 Cards Enrollment Reader Reader 1 vw Card LlAute Assignment Hame Access Level Please select an Access Level Details r Ox0U0000000 E IDE 70 2b List af scanned cards Add Options Copy Fram Global Card x Facility Code 1 Card Format BOSCH ADC Proprietary Format w Automatically replace existing card s with default reference card information de a 4 To add in the new card to the card database refer to Steps 5 6 in the section Card Enrolment Using Web Page above How to Use Search Function The Card Assignment menu allows us to search for cards by name or by card number Search By Card Search By Mame If you want to search by card number you may enter the card number in the Search By Card t field If you want to search by user name enter the user name in the Search By Name field Let us consider an example Suppose we want to search for a cardholder named John The resultant screen will be as follows Card Qssignmant Search By Card Batch Cards ih Add Card js Search By Name Select 4 CSV File Browsen Inport Export p List amp Card Report E 68 John Goh e PEF Johnny Tan Searching for a cardholder named John will display all users with John in their names You can directly click on the u
134. ct to see a CMGS nn follows by a OK this means the SMS is sent suc cessfully nn denote a double digit number provided by the GSM modem NOTICE Models supported by AEC Wavecom M1306B Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd 11 Bishan Street 21 5 3943 Singapore Singapore www boschsecurity com Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd 2012
135. d Input Point 12 13 undefined Input Point 13 14 Undefined Input Point 14 15 undefined Input Point 15 16 Undefined Input Point 16 Description provides the grouping of the Input Point if any The Dizarmed Low Digarmed Low Dizarmed Low Dizarmed Low Disarmed Low Disarmed Low Disarmed Low Disarmed Low Disarmed Low Disarmed Low Disarmed Low Disarmed Low Disarmed Low Disarmed Low Dizarmed Low Disarmed Low Invalid Card Standard 26 bit Format Invalid Second Card Read Card Number 9 Invalid Card Standard 26 bit Format Exit Denied Passback Card Number a 23 Dec 2005 Reader 1 Invalid First Card Read 11 40 33 29 Card Hurnber z5 Invalid Card 23 Dec 2005 Reader Z Invalid Card 11 40 03 0 3 Standard z amp bet Format 23 Dec 2005 Reader 4 Standard 26 bet Format Selection of Panels to control 3 5 2323333393 3535 r Mo Change C Arm How No Change C Ann Now No Change C Arm Now No Change C Arm Now No Change C Arm Now No Change C Arm Now No Change Arn Now No Change C Arm Now No Change C Arm Now No Change C Arm Now No Change C Arm Now No Change C Arm Now horizontal strip in blue pro vides the Alarm Zone to which the Input Points belong The Alarm Zones are separated by a blue line Independent Input Points do not belong to any Alarm Zone In this case Input Point 1 amp 2 belong to Alarm Zone 1 Input Point 3 amp 4 belong
136. d manually Lock the door if it is Unlocked It also allows us to Momentarily Unlock the door The Momentarily Unlock command will work only if the door is currently Locked NOTICE Exit Readers will NOT be shown in the Door Control menu By default all the Readers except for Exit Readers in the system will be shown on the screen However if you want to view a specific Controller s Readers you could select it from Panels 11 E it will list down all the on line Controllers Selecting a Controller from the list will cause the screen to refresh with only the readers from the selected Control ler How to Unlock Reader Controlled Door 1 Tounlock a specific door for an extended period of time click on the Unlock radio button Panels A11 Panel Name Central Office 1 Main Entrance Locked Closed No Change Momentarily Unlock 2 Side Entrance Locked Closed Na Change Unlock C Momentarily Unlock 3 R amp D Dept Entry Reader Locked Closed amp No Change Unlock Momentanly Unlock 4 Production Dept Entry Reader Locked Closed No Change C Unlock C Momentanly Unlock 5 Reader 5 Unlocked Closed No Change Lock C Momentanly Unlock 6 Reader 6 Unlocked Closed No Change Lock C Momentarily Unlock 7 Reader 7 Unlocked Closed No Change C Lock C Momentarily Unlock 8 Reader 8 Unlocked Closed No Change Lock Momentanly Unlock 9 Reader 9 Unlocked Closed No Change Lock C Momentanly
137. dates in which the user would like to delete the Activity Log or the Audit Log depending on which the user chooses from the system After the range of date is selected click on the button to clear the Log that falls within the date range How to Use the Auto Housekeep 1 Choose the number of days of both the Activity Log and Audit Log to be kept in the sys tem User are given a choice of 30 60 90 and 120 days For example if user chooses 30 days the system will automatically delete the Activity and Audit Logs from the system if they are more than 30 days from today s date User can also choose unlimited which means the system will not delete the logs from the system Click on the button to save the settings Alarm Event Setup An Alarm Event is any abnormal activity which we would like to monitor and be alert when such occurrence happens All the alarm descriptions are listed below Access Denied Card Disabled Input Point Fault Shorted Access Denied Passback Invalid Card Access Denied Time APB Invalid End Date Access Denied Wrong Pin Invalid First Card Read Convertor Communication Failed Invalid Second Card Read Dial In Invalid Password Invalid Start Date Dial In Invalid User Name Panel AC Failure PanelAC Fale oo Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 98 en Server Setup Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller The Alarm Event Setup provides the required settings which w
138. days select that holiday and ET a click on the button 4 Click on the button for a print preview of the report The following screen capture shows an example of the Regular Holidays Report NOTICE Only Holiday with date setting will be shown Bosch Security Systems Pte Ltd 280 Jalan Penimpin Singapore 77180 Redqular Holidays Report Thuraday Aug r6 2004 2650 P35 FM Description Date 1 Hau ddr Dag Ja n 01i 2 Lunar Mew rear Fab 15 z 04 a Christmas Dag Dar 25 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Schedules en 79 11 Schedules Schedules can be used in the following manner gt Schedules are allocated to Card Readers for Access Groupings This is to specify whether cardholders can access specific readers at specific time or cardholders need to enter PIN at specific time gt Schedules are allocated to the Card Readers to activate or deactivate readers at specified time It is also used to define whether PIN mode will be used for the reader at specified time P It is used to define the time intervals to Arm Disarm Alarm Zone gt Itis used to define the time intervals for triggering of the Output Points For example this is used for scheduled triggering of lighting utility for an area Schedules are common to all the Access Easy Controllers managed by the Access Easy Master NOTICE All entries for time are based on 24 hour 4 digits format Robert B
139. days will be used to unlock this door is selected the door will unlock every Monday to Friday from O830hrs to 1730hrs and every Saturday Sunday Regular Holiday and Special Holiday from O830hrs to 1300hrs However with Only after a valid access condition is checked the door will only unlock after a valid access card is presented to the Reader during the schedule time period For example on a Monday the first person to present his card to the Reader arrives at O845hrs Therefore the door will only unlock from 0845hrs to 1730hrs on that particular Mon day instead of from O0830hrs to 1730hrs Door Output Settings For Entry Reader Entry and Arm Disarm Reader This parameter allows user to set the timer duration that is related to the door A screen of the Door Output Settings page is shown above Door Open Timer This setting defines how long the door can be held open after an access exit is granted before the Panel registers it as Door Held Open transaction If the reader has a built in buzzer it will generate a beeping alert signal and will stop once the door is closed back It can range from O to 255 seconds The factory default is 60 seconds Door Strike Timer This setting defines the duration to de energise the Door Strike when the Momentarily Unlock command is sent via the Door Control web page or when an access exit is granted When access is granted to a Cardholder sufficient time must be given for the person to open the door
140. de field is configured in Panel Setup Default Settings if the code is different from the default then change it 3 Select the Card Format from the list 4 Select the Reader from the list If you want to Reset APB wrt all readers select All Read ers 5 Click on the button to proceed If the command is executed successfully a mes sage indicating APB reset by card amp zones with respect to reader all readers will be dis played 6 Click on the button to return 22 1 2 To reset APB based on Name wrt Reader All Readers 1 Enter a character a portion or the full name and click on the button If a match is Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 found that satisfied the entry a window will appear with the Names For example enter cy John and click button resulted in By Name Search ex Jahn d Baptst Names found John Option Name T From the window select the appropriate name The selected name appears in the Name field Select the Readers from the list If you want to Reset APB with respect to all readers select All Readers Click on the button to proceed If the command is executed successfully a mes sage indicating APB reset by name amp zones with respect to reader all readers will be dis played Click on the a button to return Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Reset APB en 213 22 1 3 22 2 22 2 1 To reset APB by All Card numbers wrt
141. desired controller to update the database This feature is useful if some controllers in the system are not fully operational and the user does not wish to update these controllers yet Or a faulty controller is being replaced with a new one hence the user could use this feature to down load the database back to the new controller NOTICE Access Easy Master can only download database to controller with status Connected Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Panel Setuplen 73 9 2 Download database to controller 1 Click on the desired controller 2 Click on the E l icon download the database 3 Click on OK to start overwrite the existing database of the selected controller 4 Once the new database is downloaded Click on the 9999 icon to return NOTICE The following database will be downloaded to the controller Card Assignment Access Level Holidays Schedule Department List Access Group Card Readers Input Setup Output Setup Advance I O Setup Input Point Configuration and Email SMS Configuration database Download card database to controller 1 Click on the desired controller 2 Click on the A icon download the card database 3 Click on OK to start overwrite the existing card database of the selected controller 4 Once the new card database is downloaded Click on the 99S icon to return NOTICE Only Card database will be downloaded to
142. digits alphabets symbols such as amp and space When User Field 2 is configured as Mobile the heading User Field 2 in the exported CSV file would appear as Mobile And for example the Mobile of Matt Brown is 98904237 In the CSV file it will appear as shown D E Jj F G User Mame Department Home Tel Mobile Matt Brown 67724590 90904237 krishnan All Ahmad santokh Singh Lee Weng Kin Can be any of the 1024 Access Level 1 in the Access Level column Access Level in the exported CSV file means that the first Access Level is selected 1024 means that Access Level 1024 is selected In this example Access Level for Matt Brown is selected as the first Access Level as shown below User Name Depart Tel Mobile Access Level Matt Brown B 72459 0 90904237 1 krishnan 0 Ali Ahmad santokh Singh 1 Lee Weng Kin 1 koh Buck Song 1 The user can leave this field blank when he is entering data in the CSV file Length User has to enter the length in the CSV file Without this field the card will not be imported into the system For example For Standard 26 bit Format the length is 26 Arm Disarm Zone The number in the Arm Disarm Zone column in the exported CSV file represents the Alarm Zone that the user can arm disarm The num ber representing the Alarm Zone is as follows Alarm Zone 1 O represented by O Alarm Zone 2 1 represented by 1 Alarm Zone 3 2 represe
143. drive Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 8 TCP IP Properties Ei DNS Configuration Gateway WINS Configuration F Address How to Configure the Access Easy Master IP Address en 185 Continuing from step 3 click on the Properties button The TCP IP Properties dialog box appears Bindings Advanced Nemos An F address can be automatically assigned to this computer IF your network does not automatically assign IP addresses ask pour network administrator for an address and then type it in the space below Specify an IP address 9 Click on the Specify an IP address radio button This will enable the field for P Address and Subnet Mask 10 Enter the P Address and Subnet Mask as shown This will be the PC s IP Address for this initial set up 11 Click on OK button 12 Reboot the computer in order for the setting to take effect NOTICE The example described above is based on Windows 98 and IE5 Differences might appear for the dialog box displays or description if other version or different operating system is used However the principle of setting is the same Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 186 en How to Configure the Access Easy Master IP Address ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 17 1 2 Settings to be made to the Web browser Now that you have successfully changed
144. e 16 7 2 To Select 2 State Non Supervised 2 State Supervised or 4 State Supervised This will provide the system installer to have the flexibility of configuring any input in the panel to be in any monitoring requirement The panel will report fault in open or short condition only when the input is configured as 4 State Supervised monitoring 1 To select either the 2 State Non Supervised 2 State Supervised or 4 State Supervised state select the radio button belonging to the Input Point accordingly Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 168 en Panels Admin ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 16 8 Email SMS Configuration To configure the Email SMS Configuration select the target Access Easy Controller and click on the Email SMS Configuration hyperlink The following screen will appear Panel Admin Panel 3 _ Email 55 Configuration jan F Bem jon Ls a in s This function allows user to configure the Access Easy Controller to send out messages or Lateness Report using Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP to email addresses A total of eight groups and eight messages field are available for configuration Each group has three Send To and three Carbon Copy Cc email addresses In order for the feature to work user has to configure the various items Devices Cardholders and Events in an AND operation To exclude disable an item s from the operation the option Selected Only or Omit Only sh
145. e click on Input Control hyperlink 2 From the View Activity page click on Input Control hyperlink 3 From any of the menu items page of the Manual Control Group a Manual Control F Input Control e 1 16 RE Alarm zone 1 Door Control Qutput Control e 3 Reset APB View Actiuitu ee Alarm zone 3 fe Alarm Zone 4 Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 1 Input Point 1 Disarmed Low Ma Change Arm Now 2 Input Point 2 Disarmed Low Alarm zone 1 3 Undefined Input Point 3 Disarmed Low f No Change Arm Now 4 Undefined Input Point 4 Disarmed Low Ma Change Arm Now 5 Undefined Input Point 5 Disarmed Low Ma Change Arm Now 6 Undefined Input Point 6 Disarmed Low ff No Change Arm Now 7 Undefined Input Point 7 Disarmed Low f Mo Change Arm Now 8 Undefined Input Point 8 Disarmed Low ff No Change Arm Now 8 Undefined Input Point 9 Disarmed Low Ma Change Arm Now 10 Undefined Input Point 10 Disarmed Low amp Ma Change Arm Now ii Undefined Input Point 11 Disarmed Low ff Mo Change Arm Now iz Undefined Input Point 12 Disarmed Low ff Mo Change Arm Now 13 Undefined Input Point 13 Disarmed Low Ma Change Arm Now i4 Undefined Input Point 14 Disarmed Low Ma Change Arm Now i5 Undefined Input Point 15 Disarmed Low Ma Change Arm Now i amp Undefined Input Point 16 Disarmed Low f Mo Change Arm Now This is the View Status page It allows user t
146. e the Access Easy Controller could synchronize its date and time with this PC There are numerous freeware available that you could install in this PC to syn chronize its date and time with an external Time Server In Appendix E we will briefly describe how you could setup a PC as a Time Server Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Server Setup en 95 12 7 12 7 1 Default Settings This setting allows user to define the descriptive name for the two user fields User Field 1 and User Field 2 and the Facility Code that will appear when Add Card or Batch Card is selected from Card Assignment menu The user fields are limited to 20 character entries each while the Facility Code range depends on the Card Format in use User can also select the Date Format and the Time Format that he prefers to view in the View Activity page and all the reports to be generated Click on Default Settings from the menu item list and you will see a screen as shown below oneteork Settings view Activity Setting amp Default Settings L Auto Lo out Timer a Compan Profile Hausekee sing o Card Format g Set Date amp Time Alarm Event Setup User Defineable Fields User Field 1 User Field 1 User Field z User Field Facility Code Facility Cade E Date Format 5ettin Date sample 2b Aug 2004 Date format dd HMM sv Date separatori Time Format Setting Time sample
147. e Backup The Database Backup allows the user to save a backup copy of current system database to the local PC It provides downloading of information which relates to the setting up of Access Easy Master e g Schedules details Card Readers parameters etc It allows user to download the history of the Activity and Attendance in Comma Separated Variable CSV format The Database Backup also allows user to restore the database back to the Access Easy Master It acts as a restore utility The following sections will guide you to perform both the operations 14 1 How to Perform Database Backup To activate Database Backup click on Database Backup from the Left Pane A screen as shown below appears Database fackuwa Database Restore System Database Backup Save a backup copy of current system database to your PC E 1 To start the backup click on t i NOTICE A Database Backup typically takes about 1 2 minutes During this period it is advisable not to change other system parameters However the Access Easy Master and the Access Easy Con trollers will not be affected by the action All operations such as door access and alarm moni toring will still operate as usual 2 A dialogue box will appear confirming whether to proceed with the backup Database backup will take 1 2 minutes Microsoft Internet Explorer E4 9 Database Backup will take 1 2 minutes Proceed E Cancel 3 Click on OK to proceed wit
148. e Return To Selection Criteria ink Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Panels Admin en 153 16 6 16 6 1 Advance I O Setup The basic need for such an operation is to enable the rerouting of physical or logical informa tion from one operation to another Due to its flexibility the type of operation it can achieve is dependent on the installer Besides normal input output and schedule selection some func tions will allow gt Inter connection with other functions gt Criteria to select Where What and Who individual and access group as well as Key input P Always On or Off Some of the advance functions that it can support are Guard Tour Feed Through OR Logic AND Logic XOR Logic NAND Logic Interlock Man Trap Up Down Counter Exit Door One Shot Vvvvvvvvvvv A description of each item will be given below Guard Tour This function is used when the block is used as one of the guard tour stations in the guard tour routes A toggle key switch can be used to activate guard tour registration If key is switched to ON state and is not removed a reminder alarm will be activated Guard Tour Input Toggle Input Output Description Guard Tour Input This input is edge triggered from O to 1 leading edge amp toggling A key switch can be connected to this input Guard Tour Ouput A LED is normally connected to this output
149. e Schedule is set to O830hrs and 1730hrs respectively The Reader status will be set accordingly The following drawing pro vides a pictorial representation of the function O8s0hrs 1731hrz Reader Status POTESN P N Required 2 SL Required EE EN NN NN NN NC NC Notice that PIN is required at 1731hrs instead of 1730hrs The reason is that Access Easy Con troller takes 17 30 59hrs as a valid End time for 1730hrs This mode is not affected by Holiday setting i e during holiday it will still use the Day of Week schedule NOTICE 1 To use this feature as intended the cardholder should be given access rights to the reader s 2 In order for the feature to work the cardholder s Card PIN is required on keypad readers mode must be activated PIN code required except during regular schedule intervals and holiday schedule intervals When this mode is selected the operation is the same as the previous mode except that dur ing holiday the Holiday schedule is used instead of the normal Day of Week schedule PIN code only operation using Reader s PIN code When this mode is selected all cardholders will use a pre defined Reader s PIN code default code 1234000 to gain access to the controlled area or to arm disarm the Alarm Zone No card is required The Reader s PIN code is defined in the Reader s PIN code 1 7 digits edit field Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 140 en Panels Admin
150. e and the command radio button configured for Unlock mode Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 32 en Manual Control ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Poor Control Panels fall 5 1 3 Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 3 R amp D Dept Entry Reader Locked Closed No Change C Unlock C Momentarily Unlock 4 Production Dept Entry Reader Locked Closed No Change C Unlock o Momentarily Unlock 5 Reader 5 Unlocked Closed No Change C Lock C Momentarily Unlock 6 Reader 6 Unlocked Closed Na Change C Lock C Momentarily Unlock 7 Reader Unlocked Closed No Change C Lock C Momentarily Unlock 8 Reader 8 Unlocked Closed No Change Lock C Momentarily Unlock 8 Reader 9 Unlocked Closed No Change C Lock C Momentarily Unlock 10 Reader 10 Unlocked Closed No Change C Lock C Momentarily Unlock 11 Reader 11 Unlocked Closed No Change C Lock C Momentarily Unlock 12 Reader 12 Unlocked Closed No Change C Lock C Momentarily Unlock 13 Reader 13 Unlocked Closed No Change Lock C Momentarily Unlock 14 Reader 14 Unlocked Closed No Change Lock C Momentarily Unlock 15 Reader 15 Unlocked Closed No Change C Lock C Momentarily Unlock 16 Reader 16 Unlocked Closed No Change C Lock C Momentarily Unlock How to Momentarily Unlock Reader Controlled Door iM To momentarily unlock a specific door click on the Momentarily Unlock radio button Panels all Panel Name Central O
151. e controlled door However if Soft APB is used this command will reset the Activity transac tions for Access Granted Soft APB and Exit Granted Soft APB for violator s subsequent access or exit respectively User is given the option to reset the APB violation with the following combination gt By Card number with respect to wrt Reader All Readers or gt By Name with respect to Reader All Readers or gt By All Card numbers with respect to Reader All Readers 22 1 To activate Reset APB There are various ways to activate the Reset APB menu item They are 1 From any menu item page click on Reset APB hyperlink 2 From the View Activity page click on Reset APB hyperlink 3 From any of the menu items page of the Manual Control Group Manual Control f Reset Anti Passback He Door Control ee Input Control eel Output Contral View Activity APB Report By Card Card Number Facility Code 0 Card Format All Card Formats bal By Name Search Gy By Reader OZO OOOO Description All Readers 22 1 1 To reset APB based on Card Number wrt Reader All Readers To Reset APB based on Card Number you must know the following Card Number its Facility Code and its Card Format Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 212 en Reset APB ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 1 Enter the Card Number of the APB violator 2 The number in the Facility Co
152. e edit hyperlink is clicked for that row the screen as shown below appears Aecess Level Undefined Access Level 6 Access Group A Access Group EH Main Office edit edit central Office E 6 Click on the down arrow to select an Access Group for Access Group A and Access Group B Leave the entry as blank or Unused if it is not required Aecess Level Undefined Access Level 6 Access Group A Access Group B Main Office edit edit central Office Full ACCESS 7 Click W to save the new settings NOTICE The Access Groups in each controller has to be pre defined in the controller itself To define the Access Groups in the individual controller go to Panels Admin Access Groups Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Access Levels en 67 7 3 How to Print Access Level Report An Access Level report contains details of all the Access Levels which are configured Unde fined Access Levels will not be included in the report To print an Access Level Report click on Access Level Report ocated on the top right cor ner of the Access Levels first page The Access Level Report Generation web page has a drop down list box which shows all the configured Access Levels Select the Access Levels you want to include in the Access Level Report by clicking once on the Access Level in the drop down box The Selected List of Acc
153. e ined ej Exit Zone Undef ined z aie ruis t PP oor TEN EN r3 WE A screen of the Anti Passback APB Settings page is shown above Anti Passback APB function prevents a cardholder from passing his her card to another per son to gain access to the door after he has accessed through it It is normally implemented in sensitive area having high security Three types of APB modes are available namely Time Based APB Soft APB and Full APB Each mode provides different level of security and is explained in detail in the following sec tions Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Panels Admin en 141 APB deactivated By default it is set to APB deactivated This means that there is no APB setting for the Readers on this Access Easy Controller Activate Time Based APB Time Based APB relates to Entry Reader only implying that the Panel will not accept the same card until the Timer setting for Time Based APB has elapsed To select this mode select Activate Time Based APB When this mode is selected the Timer setting for Timed Based APB must be set Choose the timing from the list box in minutes from a range of O minutes to 60 minutes Activate Soft APB Soft APB mode operation requires a cardholder to present his her card at the Entry Reader and Exit Reader at all times However if he she follow another person in or out the controlled area the transaction Exit Gran
154. e place NOTICE Due to there is a limited number of Serial com port available in the CPU only either the GSM adapter or the Analogue Dial up modem can be connected to the Access easy controller hence dial up features will not be enable when SMS server is be configured like wise to the SMS server when Dial up is been setup Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 224 en Panel Setup 23 6 23 6 1 23 6 2 Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Set Date amp Time The Access Easy for Master allows user to set the Date and Time of the real time clock within the controller For countries that practice Daylight Saving Time the feature is included Time setting is in the 24 hour format The Date and Time set here is displayed on the status bar of the web browser during the View Activity To activate Date amp Time Setting 1 From the Panel Setup screen click on the Set Date amp Time bar Panel Admin Panel Setup Network Settings input Point Configuration Sat Date amp Time me Logout Timer Audit Log Default Settings e Card Format 2 Company Prafile Ernail Sms Configuration Hour 09 Minute 03 Second 37 Day Oo Month Det Year 2005 Choose Time Zone GMT 08 00 Singapore v To set the Date amp Time 1 Select your Time Zone from the list and click on the button NOTICE If your country is not listed please select an alte
155. e super user whose access rights cannot be changed The Users Setup menu item allows the System Administrator to define different access to users by selecting whether a particular user can have View and or Save rights to configuration functions It is important that only authorized users are able to change the following settings as the implication could be a security breach if unauthorized user gives themselves access to impor tant feature in the system such as full access for their cards or unlock a door NOTICE The default Password and User ID should be changed once the system is in operation In the following sections of this Chapter we will be referring to Login User as the user who will login to the Access Easy Master from any computer using a Web Browser program and oper ates the system 8 1 Setting User Access This section describes how to change User Name and Password and how to change the access to menu items The following is a screen of the Users Setup page Users Click on either the User Name or the User ta edit the setting SERRE Eb bib RES rakor imuk i Lseres Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 8 1 1 How to Change User Name and Password 1 Users Setup en 69 Click on the User Name or its User and the following screen will appear User Name Vincent Password Sr Activity View Activity Map Manual Control Door Cont
156. eaders 1 Select the Readers from the list If you want to Reset APB with respect to all readers select All Readers 2 Click on the Q button to proceed If the command is executed successfully a message indicating APB reset by all cards amp zones with respect to reader all readers will be dis played 3 Click on the lt a button to return Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 182 en How to Configure the Access Easy Master IP Address ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 17 17 1 17 1 1 Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 How to Configure the Access Easy Master IP Address Configuring the IP address of the Access Easy Master requires you to initially prepare a PC Macintosh This PC Macintosh will need to have network enabled In other words it needs a network card pre installed Refer to the figure below RJ 45 Connector RJ 45 Connector UTP Cat 5 Cable Access Easy Master Max Distance 100m PC Macintosh 1 Connect the PC Macintosh to the Access Easy Master with a RJ45 Cross cable 2 Set the IP address of the PC Macintosh to 129 2 0 40 and Subnet Mask as 255 255 0 0 For PC Users Changing the PC s IP address Setting the IP address of the PC is rather simple However if you have doubt do ask your net work administrator to assist you The purpose of changing the IP address of the PC is to allow it to access the Access Easy Mas ter which has a default IP address of 129 2 0 42 factory
157. ed The following diagram shows a drawing that has more than one Access easy controller in the network These controllers work stand alone but shared a common GSM adapter which is attached to a dedicated access easy controller serial com port Access nary Controller Access Easy Controller Pocass Easy Controller wa id i fs Aocess Easy Controller i i i The Access Easy Controller 1 has the GSM adapter connected to it s serial com port hence it is also acting as a SMS Server to help relay the other Access Easy for Master messages to the Service Provider NOTICE Please ensure that GSM adapter baudrate is configure at 19200bps 8bit data 1 stop bit and no parity settings Please refer to the Appendix G for details and models adapter of GSM that support this feature Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Panel Setup en 221 Whenever there is any SMS message that needed to be send the respective Access Easy for Master will send the SMS messages over to the Access Easy for Master SMS Server and the SMS Server will send via the GSM adapter to the Service Provider These controllers are defined as the SMS Client Hence there is a need to control which is the IP Address that is allowed to send SMS this is to prevent unauthorised personnel sending SMS via your Access Easy Controller To Configure Access Easy for Master as a SMS Server By default the SMS Server IP address is blank If thi
158. ed Closed Locked Closed Locked Closed Lacked Closed Unlocked Closed Unlocked Closed Unlocked Closed Unlocked Closed Unlocked Closed Unlocked Closed Unlocked Closed Unlocked Clased Unlocked Closed Unlocked Closed Unlocked Closed Unlocked Closed Unlock C Unlock C Unlock C Unlock C Lock C Lock C Lack C Lock Ma Change M Change Mo Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change Lock No Change Lock No Change No Change Lock No Change Lock No Change Lock No Change Lock No Change Lock icon to submit send the command C Momentarily Unlock C Momentarily Unlock C Momentarily Unlock C Momentarily Unlock C Momentarily Unlock C Momentarily Unlock C Momentarily Unlock C Momentarily Unlock C Momentarily Unlock C Momentarily Unlock C Momentarily Unlock C Momentarily Unlock C Momentarily Unlock C Momentarily Unlock C Momentarily Unlock C Momentarily Unlock The selected door will Lock immediately Cardholders will now be required to present their card to the Reader in order to pass though the door At the same time that the door is Locked Access Easy Master will refresh the Door Control screen and update both the Current Status and the command radio buttons so they will be ready for the next com mand The following screen shows an example of the Current Status of two doors named Main Entrance and Side Entrance in Locked Closed mod
159. ed High The Input Point has been Bypassed though the Alarm Zone is Armed This situation happens when the current status of the Input Point is open before the Input Point is armed Manual Actions column provides the check box for selection of the input points to issue the command There are 2 types of action command available a This icon means that by selecting the check box an Arming com mand will be issued when submitted Alternatively click on the icon to arm the Alarm Zone This icon means that by selecting the check box a Disarming command will be issued when submitted Alternatively click on the icon to disarm the Alarm Zone By default all the inputs in the system will be shown on the screen However if you want to Panels A ii view a specific Controller s inputs you could select it from t will list down all the on line Controllers Selecting a Controller from the list will cause the screen to refresh with only the Input Points from the selected Controller Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 36 en Manual Control 5 2 1 5 2 2 Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller How to Arm Disarm an Input Point These are Input points that are not included in any of the 4 Alarm Zones nor is it controlled by Schedule They are independent points that could be armed or disarmed by itself Input Point that does not belong to any Alarm Panels
160. ed Schedule from the Schedule list box 4 When Schedules will be used to unlock this door or Schedules and Holidays will be used to unlock this door is selected the door will unlock on time even if nobody is in the premises However with the Only after a valid access condition checked the system will only unlock the door after a valid access card is presented during the schedule time period Example Unlock door Schedules will not be used to unlock this door Schedules will be used to unlock this door 090 5 Schedules and holidays will be used to unlock this door Schedule Normal Schedule al Only after a valid access condition In the screen above the mode Schedules and Holidays will be used to unlock this door is selected and the selected Schedule is Normal Schedule In addition the checkbox Only after a valid access condition is checked Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 134 en Panels Admin 16 3 4 Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller The screen below shows the schedule for Normal Schedule which has been selected Schedule 4 Schedule Description Normal Schedule Start End Start End Start End Start End 08 30 13 00 i 08 30 TX 0 30 17 30 0S a0 17 30 06 30 i7 30 08 30 17 30 08 30 i3 00 0 30 13 00 08 30 13 00 99e9veeees According to the schedule in Normal Schedule above when the mode Schedules and Holi
161. eld separating each Address by a space or a comma The screen capture shows the Default IP Address for Access Easy Master and three assigned Access Easy Controllers IP Addresses 129 2 0 45 129 2 0 44 and 129 3 0 80 8 Click on the OK button to close the dialog box With this settings done we can proceed to access the Access Easy Master To change the IP address of the Access Easy Master follow the steps in the section Changing the IP address of Access Easy Master above Changing the IP address of the Access Easy Master on the Macintosh is the same as changing it on the PC Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 194 en Accessing and Understanding Access Easy for Master Main Menu ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 18 18 1 18 2 Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Accessing and Understanding Access Easy for Master Main Menu In this chapter you will learn the basic information of how to access the and logging onto the Access Easy for Master software Access Easy for Master Software GUI is the same as Access Easy Controller Software GUI BUT Access Easy for Master Software only support minimal functions as most of the functions are centrally administer and control by Access Easy Master Software In order to operate one or more Controller from one or more computers a standard web browser program such as nternet Explorer version 4 0 and above or Netscape Navigator ver sion 4 0 and above on each of the central mo
162. eport allows you to select to generate report for all Users or selected Users only To generate a report for all Users just click on the 3 leaving the Selected list of Users blank To generate a report for selected User select the users from the pull down list by clicking on the name of the user 4 Click on 3 to start generating the Log The following shows a sample of the report generated for Vincent Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 116 en Report Generation 13 4 2 Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 User Log Saturday Eram 03 Sep 2003 ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Bosch Secur ity Systems Pte Ltd 38C Jalan Peninpin Singapore 577180 ix Sap UDS il1 22 232 To 13 Eep Z003 Date Teme Name Acton E Wingert Logged ir E e Vincent Logged out reir die qu Vincent Logged in eae Wincent Logged im il s Mincenk Logged aut ri drm Vincent Logged in iode n d Vincent Logged in solos aie Wincent Logged out System Log The System Log provides a report on the system status 1 To generate the System Log select the radio button for System Log 2 Click on to start generating the Log The following is a sample of the report Bosch Security Systems Pte Ltd SSC Jalan Peminpin Singapore 577150 System Log Friday 235 Deo 2005 14 05 42 AEMC 2 1 29f 2 OO 04 5F 81 20 10 172 16 10 99 Product Marne Hardware A amp ddrezs MAC Internet Address Serial number 7D531Ci1BE471 Panel
163. ept Entry Reader Clock Gut 14 42 00 1i Bill Clinton 12 Jul 2004 Side Entrance Clock Gut 14 41 06 6 Tiger Woods 12 Jul 2004 Main Entrance Clock Gut 14 40 21 1 Michael Owen 1 Jul 2004 Production Dept Entry Reader Clock In Vr Gs aT 26 vincent Linn 1 i2 Jul 004 R amp D Dept Entry Reader Clock In 14 38 33 23 Eric Ho How to Process Alarms Events The View Activity provides a easy colour scheme to differentiate between new transactions new alarms and acknowledged alarms gt All new transactions have a yellow background The new transactions will appear in the View Activity in real time mode 1 O08 Sep 2003 Entrance 2 Access Granted 09 16 43 16 Jerry Maguire gt All Alarm transactions have red coloured text wording while other transactions have black coloured text wording 1 08 Sep 2003 Side Entrance Door Held Open 2 09 23 49 William Sim P When the web page refreshes automatically the yellow background is replaced with grey 1 1 al 1 background except for Alarm transactions which remain unless the button is acti vated 1 O08 Sep 2003 Entrance 2 Access Granted 9 27 3 0 16 Jerry Maguire Process Event Transactions New Valid and Restored transactions are shown in yellow background and black text When the web page refreshes the background will be changed to grey Furthermore depending on the View Activity Setting the screen will be restricted to the number of transactions shown However unacknowledged
164. er Enable Keypad Only Operation When this mode is selected the user need not present his her card to gain access or Arm Dis arm the Alarm Zone see NOTICE 1 Instead the cardholder only has to key in his her card number see NOTICE 2 followed by its PIN code Only if PIN function is required NOTICE 1 Cardholder can still present his her card to gain access or Arm Disarm If PIN code is required user has to present card followed by PIN code 2 User has to activate the key first before entering the card number Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Panels Admin en 131 On Holidays follow holiday schedules to work in conjunction with Card Functionality This mode works in conjunction with the Card Assignment Cardholder must abide by holiday schedules If both are checked and the current date is a holiday the panel will apply the 4 sets of Schedule intervals setting in the Regular or Special Holiday depending on which Holiday Type the current date setting is on for processing for each cardholder Keypad Timeout Keypad Timeout relates to the interval where the Panel expects key entry via the reader s key pad from the user If the user does not press any key within this duration or when the user for gets to quit from a specific operation the Panel will return to the normal mode to wait for card presentation or user action during a PIN change or Manual Card N
165. er Double click it ta connect To edit this connection later click it click the File menu and then click Properties x Back Cancel Click on Finish to complete your connection Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller J 2 as shown below 4 Dial Up Networking File Edt View Go Favorites Connec le gt fg t Fack Bamana Up Man Address 23 Dial Up Networking Make New 5 E RTT DR Connection Dial in User en 235 After clicking on Finish you would have created a new connection named My Connection 10 To Connect to the Access Easy for Master double click on My Connection and you will be led to a screen as shown below lt Connect To hy Connection 2 User name adc Paszward E Save password Phone number joo 65 57438088 Dialing from New Location Dial Properties tees In the User name and Password box enter the Dial In User name and Password of the Access Easy for Master which you want to connect to In the phone number box enter the phone number for the Access Easy for Master you want to connect to and then click on the Connect button 11 After successfully connecting you have to log on to the Access Easy for Master as shown in the screenshot below from the Web Browser application 12 Enter the User ID and Password of the Access Easy for Master in the appropriate fields Robert Bosch SE
166. er 1 0 1 2012 10 ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller With such configuration the Panel will keep track of the cut off time from Monday through Saturday at O900hrs and will send out the Lateness Report to the recipient s The screen capture below illustrates what the email recipient s is expected to receive gt The following Cardholders are late AECObosch com sg Tc HRbosch com sg 08 09 04 05 00 PM a Subject Lateness Report 09 Aug 2004 09 00 38 AM The following cardholders are late OO01 Eric Ho 135 DO0DZ Vincent 115 0003 Simon Cowell 28331 0004 Auyondg i 1234 0005 hientje 229 0006 Cameron Diaz 53431 0007 Lucy Liu i 53686 0008 Michelle Lee 53001 gt All Employees are punctual AECGhosch com sg HR bosch com sq 08 09 04 05 00 PM Doo cc j Lateness Report 03 Aug 2004 09 00 38 4M Sood News Nobody is late Email Server Settings This section allows user to define the address of the Outgoing Mail SMTP server the SMTP port to use and the Access Easy Controller Email Address Name Click on the Email Server Settings ink to go to the Outgoing Mail SMTP server configuration page The Outgoing Mail SMTP Server defines the server that is to provide your email facilities and the Access Easy Controller s Email Address Name is the reply address for emails sent by the Access Easy Controller that is the name address that is to appear in the
167. er 7 Reader 8 Reader 9 Reader 10 Reader 11 Reader 12 Reader 15 Reader 14 Reader 15 Reader 16 D oO om gi kw M H E op P P LB H Hc a fF tt D dB C Locked Closed Locked Closed Locked Closed Locked Closed Door Held Open Door Held Open Door Held Open Door Held Open Door Held Open Door Held Open Door Held Open Daar Held Open Door Held Open Door Held Open Door Held Open Door Held Open Mo Chang f Na Change No Change 9 No Change No Change Na Change No Change 9 Na Change Na Change No Change No Change Na Change fe No Change No Change No Change Na Change O Unlock C Momentarily Unlock gt Unlock O Momentarily Unlock O Unlock C Momentarily Unlock O Unlock 5 Momentarily Unlock O Unlock Momentarily Unlock O Unlock Momentarily Unlock Unlock Momentarily Unlock O Unlock Momentarily Unlock Oi Unlock 5 Momentarily Unlock C Unlock C Momentarily Unlock O Unlock Momentarily Unlock O Unlock Momentarily Unlock iUnlock 5 Momentarily Unlock O Unlock Momentarily Unlock O Unlock Momentarily Unlock Unlock C Mamentarily Unlock The following paragraphs provide some description of what will you see on the web page Current Status provide user with the current status of the door There are 5 door control sta tus Status Locked Closed Unlocked Open Unlocked Closed Door Forced Open Door Held Open Robert Bosch
168. er will need to define whether a card is a First Card Second Card or Don t Care Card and which group it belongs to Cards from different groups cannot unlock the door Dual Card Assignment Dual Card not assigned Dual Card presentation sequence Don t Care Dual Card Group ID 1 255 1 Select the radio button Dual Card presentation sequence to enable this mode User will need to define whether a card is a First Card Second Card or Don t Care Card from the list box First Card E User will also have to select the Dual Card Group ID from the list box 1 zz 2 cards from the same Dual Card Group ID must be presented to the Reader to unlock the door All the possible card combinations that can be presented to the Reader is shown in the table on the following page Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Card Assignment en 47 6 2 6 2 1 Possible card combination First Card Second Card This mode works in conjunction with Card Access Admin Card Readers Dual Card Configura tion of the Access Easy Controller Please ensure that the setting in the Access Easy Controller is configured properly NOTICE For the first combination in the table above the Don t Care cards must be 2 different cards from the same Dual Card Group ID Adding and Deleting Cards This section will describe How to Add a New Card How to Add a Batch of Cards and How to Delete a Batch of Cards Unde
169. er you are dialing M y Connection 2 Select a device Standard Modem Configure Back Cancel 5 Follow the instructions on the screen Make sure that a modem is connected to your PC Select the appropriate modem by clicking on the Select a device drop down box 6 Next configure your modem by clicking on the configure button and entering the various configuration options as shown in the next screen shot U S Robotics 55K FAX EXT Properties General Connection Options Distinctive Ring U S Robotics 56K FA EXT Fort Communications Port COM1 Communications Port LIB 1 speak Communications Port COM Maximum speed 115200 Gale connect at this speed Cancel Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 234 en Dial in User ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 7 After configuring your modem click on next and you will see a screen as shown in the next screen shot Hake New Connection Type the phone number Far the computer you want to call Area code Telephone number b5 j 67438088 Enter the telephone number for the Access Easy for Master that you want to connect to and click on next 8 You will see a screen as shown below Hake Hew Connection You have successtully created a new Dial Up Networking connection called M y Connection 2 Click Finish to save itin your Dial Up Networking fold
170. ers will have to present their card first before entering their PIN code to gain access at the reader before the Keypad Timeout configured in the page Panels Admin Card Readers Reader Options Disable card from all access permanently When this mode is selected user card will be denied access from the system This feature is useful to prevent illegal access to the system should the user lost misplaced the card Cardholder with one time access only This will enable the administrator to assign card holder with only one time access to the sys tem This means that after the card holder has gained access his access will become invalid immediately To gain access he needs to request the administrator to reactivate the one time access right again To enable this mode check Cardholder with one time access only Ensure that the Valid radio button is selected for Access Status ccess Status Valid Expired After the card has been used for one time access the Access Status will expire immediately and the Access Status will update to Expired amp ccess Status C walid Expired Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 46 en Card Assignment ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Enter user PIN 1 7 digits User PIN is to be used together with the Card PIN mode This field will contain up to maxi mum digit Extended duration for door access This function is to facilitate special card ho
171. ess n My Undefined Access Level 7 i v Undefined Access Level 9 Undefined Access Level 11 V Free ree Laval py Undefined Access Level 13 f vel 1d lindefined Areece evel 5 EBRIE roto stoner eo ro The Access Levels screen will show the different Access Levels with their descriptions After activating the Access Levels we need to configure the Access Levels for granting access across different Controllers Select from the list box on the top left corner to select Access Level that are more than 100 Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 66 en Access Levels ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 7 2 How to Configure Access Levels 1 Click on the Access Level can be any of the 1024 undefined Access Levels you want to configure You will see a screen as shown below flecess Level Undefined Access Level 6 Access Group A Access Group B Main Office edit edit edit edit Central Office 2 Enter the Description for the Access Level in the space provided 3 You will see a list of available Access Easy Controllers in the Access Level screen 4 Check on the Controllers you wish to add in the Access Level For this example the con troller is Central Office Central Office 5 Click on the edit hyperlink under Access Group A or B to select the appropriate Access Grouping for Access Group A and B from the list There is no priority or precedents in Access Group A or B When any of th
172. ess hitp wen adc com sg Uze Eurent Use Default Use Blank Temporary Internet files yes Pages you view on the Internet are stored in a special folder i d for quick viewing later Delete Files Settings The History folder contains links to pages you ve visited for quick access to recently viewed pages Days to keep pages in history 20 Clear History Colors Fonts Languages Accessibility es oooh 2 If you wish to show the Access Easy for Master Login page every time you activate your web browser program then change the Home page Address to the Access Easy for Master assigned IP address see NOTICE else leave it as what was defined previously NOTICE The Network Administrator should assign the IP Address if the Access Easy for Master is to be connected to the Network 3 Under the Temporary Internet files heading click on the Settings button to go into the next dialog box Confirm that the Check for newer versions of stored pages is set to Every visit to the page as shown in the following diagram If it is not click on the corresponding radio button This step is necessary in order for the view in View Activity to be updated periodically Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller APPENDIX F Initial Setup To Access Easy Controller en 271 Settings GAS pus 4 sre TTG Senge C enis
173. ess Levels window will display the Access Levels you want to be included in the Access Level Report decesa Level Mago Generation Available Access Levels Selected list of Access Levels Stafi Access Visitor r LOWE ten Jn F me i um n j I NOTICE Only configured Access Levels will be shown in the list box for selection Configured Access Levels are those with at least one Access Easy Controller checked and at least one Access Group configured and not left blank To print an Access Level Report click on the submit icon A sample Access Level Report is as shown below Bosch Security Systems Pte Ltd 38C Jalan Peninpin Singapore 577180 Access Level Report Ahendsecdgay Juy ch c2004 Sr UE Sa AN Access Lavel Access Level Description Panel Descrpbon Access Group A Access Group B 1 Roaming Access for Science Pk Central Office Full Access Unused Gateway Office Full amp ccazz Unused z Lewel 2 Managers Access Central office Normal Access Group Unused Gateway Office Normal Access Group Lin uze d i Lewel 1 fianagers Access Central Office Unused Normal Access Group Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 68 en Users Setup ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 8 Users Setup Each user can be assigned access rights to access and carry out configuration on certain or all functions of the Access Easy Master Access Easy Master can support up to 25 users including th
174. ete see NOTICE NOTICE During the rebooting process the Access Easy Master disconnects itself from the computer and the web page on the computer screen will show Rebooting System before the web page becomes blank User must close and re launch the web browser program Login to Access Easy Master again after the process is completed Once the Server is up and running again please re enter the Server URL Address and proceed with the Login Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 122 en Reboot Shutdown and Logout ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 15 2 15 3 Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Shutdown Function The Shutdown function allows user to stop the Access Easy Master system properly if the user is required to Shutdown can be activated only from the Left Pane menu item 1 From any menu item page click on the Shutdown link from the Left Pane The following dialog box appears for confirmation Microsoft Internet Explorer I lt 5 Do you really want to shutdown the Server Cancel 2 Click on the OK button to proceed 3 It takes about 2 minutes for the system to shutdown CAUTION During the shutting down process the Access Easy Master disconnects itself from the com puter and the web page on the computer screen will show System shutting down Logout Function The Logout function allows the user to do a proper exit from the web browser Logout can be activ
175. etting 1 Select the appropriate number from the Number of Transactions To View list box g 2 Click on the SL icon to save your setting Company Profile The Company Profile feature is used as a letterhead in all the report generated as shown below Card Report Access Level Report Holidays Report Schedules Report Audit Log Report Access Groups Report Card Reader Report Input Point Report Output Point Report and Advance I O Report Vvvvvvvvvvyv Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Server Setup en 91 12 5 1 12 5 2 Each field is limited to a 50 characters entry including punctuation In this section user can also configure the departments available in the company Click on Company Profile from the menu item list and you will see a screen as shown below Network Settings view Activity Settin e Default Settings ep Auto Logout Timer ei Company Profile all Housekeepin 2d Card Format te Set Date amp Time n2 Alarm Event Setu fn Department List Company Mame Bogzch Security Systems Pte Ltd Address 1 300 Jalan Pemimpin Address 2 Singapore 557140 How to Edit Company Profile 1 Delete the default text and enter the desired Company Name 2 Do likewise for the Address 1 and Address 2 field BE 3 Click on the button As an example we enter the following information in the respective fields Company Name Bosch
176. ew address you have just set for example if you want to change the address of your Access Easy for Master to 129 3 0 99 and the mac address of your Access Easy Controller is 52 54 4c 0 0 2c and the address of your PC is 129 3 0 77 the command will be arp s 129 3 0 99 52 54 4c 0 0 2c 129 3 0 77 ping 129 3 0 99 Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 278 en APPENDIX F Initial Setup To Access Easy Controller ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 If you are using Unix Linux and OS 2 arp s new address you want to specify for your Access Easy for Master mac address of your Access Easy Controller temp ping new address you have just set for example if you want to change the address of your Access Easy for Master to 129 3 0 99 and the mac address of your Access Easy Controller is 52 54 Ac 0 0 2c the command will be arp s 129 3 0 99 52 54 4c 0 0 2c temp ping 129 3 0 99 After you have issue the ping command to the Access Easy Controller it should reboot After it has rebooted it will resume operation using the new IP address that you have set Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller APPENDIX Glen 279 34 APPENDIX G 34 1 Preparing the WAVECOM GSM Modem for Access Easy Controller 1 Insert the SIM Chip into the GSM Modem 2 Power up the GMS modem 3 Connect the PC serial port and the Modem using the serial cable that
177. f doors for each Cardholder an Access Level is assigned to each card Each Access Level consists of one or more Access Group from different Access Easy Controller An Access Group is a list of readers within certain authorised time periods pre defined Schedule that the cardholders can access Access Easy Master has up to 1024 user definable Access Levels Please refer to Chapter 7 Access Levels for details on the configuration of Access Levels Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 44 en Card Assignment ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Card Functionality Card Functionality consists of the Arm Disarm access rights access behaviour validation dates and dual card assignment status Each card can be configured to behave differently However some settings would only be activated with the co ordination of the Card Readers parameters such as Card PIN mode and Cardholder must abide by holiday schedules The screen below shows the card functionality for a user Card holder is able to Arm Disarm Edit Card holder must abide by holiday schedules To work in conjunction with Reader Options Allow exit reader usage only in accordance with time schedules Card PIN is required on keypad readers Disable card from all access permanently Gard holder with one time access only Access Status Valid Expired Enter user PIM 1 7 digits Extended duration for door access seconds Card Validation Date
178. f priorities for individual location alarms 1 From the Global Alarm Priority Setup screen click on the Individual Alarm Priority Setup hyperlink A screen as shown below appears Alarm Priority Setu Alarm Event Condition Setup Alarm Instruction Message Setup Individual Alarm Priority 2 Click onthe button to add a new individual alarm priority to the system The screen as shown below appears Alarm Priority Setup Alarm Event Condition Setup Alarm Instruction Message Setup Individual Alarm Priority Setup Readers avai lable Readers Available Alarmz zi C I O Points available I 0 Points available Alarmz Priority Highest Priority Detail 3 Select the appropriate option button If Reader is selected you will need to select which Readers to assign this priority from the Available Readers list box The Available Alarms allow you to choose which type of alarm this selected Reader will have the priority If O Points is selected you will need only to select which Input Point to assign this priority 4 Next select the level of priority from the Priority list box 5 To save the setting click on the U button Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Server Setup en 101 12 9 2 Alarm Event Condition Setup This part of the setting allows you to define up to 256 different Alarm Event Each Alarm Event can consis
179. ffice 1 Main Entrance Unlocked Closed Na Change Lock 2 Side Entrance Unlocked Closed No Change Lock C Momentarily Unlock 3 R amp D Dept Entry Reader Unlocked Closed Na Change Lock Momentarily Unlock 4 Production Dept Entry Reader Unlocked Closed No Change C Lock C Momentarily Unlock amp Elevator Reader Unlocked Closed Mo Change Lock C Momentarily Unlock 6 Reader 6 Unlocked Closed No Change C Lock C Momentarily Unlock 7 Reader 7 Unlocked Closed Mo Change Lock C Momentarily Unlock 8 Reader amp Unlocked Closed Wo Change Lock C Momentarily Unlock 9 Reader 9 Unlocked Closed Na Change Lock C Momentarily Unlock 10 Reader 10 Unlocked Closed No Change Lock C Momentarily Unlock 11 Reader 11 Unlocked Closed Na Change Lock C Momentarily Unlock 12 Reader 12 Unlocked Closed Na Change C Lock C Momentarily Unlock 13 Reader 13 Unlocked Closed Mo Change Lock C Momentarily Unlock 14 Reader 14 Unlocked Closed Mo Change C Lock C Momentarily Unlock 15 Reader 15 Unlocked Closed Mo Change Lock C Momentarily Unlock i6 Reader 16 Unlocked Closed No Change Lock C Momentarily Unlock 2 Click on icon to submit send the command The selected door will Momentarily Unlock The door will remain Unlocked for the duration of time specified in the Reader configuration usually 5 to 10 seconds At the expiration of the Unlock duration the door will automati
180. format in Access Easy Master In this example 2 repre sents Standard 26 bit Format as shown below BOSCH ADC Proprietary Format Standard 34 bit Format AEC Priority Format User Name Limited to a length of 30 alphanumeric characters Department Configurable up to 255 departments O in the Department column in the exported CSV file means that department is NOT selected for the cardholder 1 would mean that the department is the first listed in Access Easy Master In this example 1 represents R amp D Depart ment as shown below R amp D Department Accounts Department Engineering Department Service Department Project Department Production Department Sales Marketing Department Purchasing Department Limited to a length of 20 alphanumeric characters including digits alphabets symbols such as amp and space When User Field 1 is configured as Home Tel the heading User Field 1 in the exported CSV file would appear as Home Tel And for example the Home Tel of Matt Brown is 67724590 In the CSV file it will appear as shown below User Field 1 User Mame Department Home Tel User Field 2 Matt Brown b 22458 Krishnan Ali Ahmad santokh Singh Lee Weng Kin Koh Buck Song Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 54 en Card Assignment ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller eed User Field 2 Limited to a length of 20 alphanumeric characters including
181. ftware etc Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 226 en Panel Setup ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 23 8 1 To View the User Log 1 Click on the Audit Log on any of the Panel Setup page and the following page will be shown Panel Admin j Panel Setup iO User Lag Fram TO Mame All Names Q System Log 2 Select the radio button for the User Log as shown above Choose the From date and To date from the pull down list 4 Select the User Name from the pull down list box of the field Name If a particular User has been selected the report will only shows the operation of that User If All Names is selected the result will be a report containing all the action taken by all users on this sys tem pn 5 Click the button to request Access Easy for Master to enquiry for the report 6 The following is a screen capture of how the report will looks like m echan c na far Bosch Security Systems Pte Ltd THC Jalan Pakimpin Singapore 577180 User Log tuaaday if Bap 20042 da 5 4 Frari Po T munmunmum Hare AS Moores Ha Eracte Tina Manna Action Description i i2 Sap 2005 15 51 44 USERI Logged i z 1 Sap 2005 15 527 04 USERI Addad card 1 E 12 Sap 2005 15 54 57 WSER1 Logged out 4 12 Sep 2005 19 957 42 USERI Legged in E 1 Sap 2005 16 07 45 USER Legged in 2 12 Sep 2005 16 12 37 USER Changed card setting 111 T 12 Sap 2005 16 13 42 USER
182. ge of the Access Groups menu item click on the Access Groups Report Iink A screen as shown below appears Panel Admin Panel 3 Access Groups Access Group Description 411 Acces Groups 2 Select the desired Access Group from the drop down list If no particular Access Group is selected all the available Access Groups will be generated in the report 3 Click on the button for a print preview of the report The following screen capture shows a sample of the Access Groups Report for Production Team A Access Group Return To Access Groups Return To Selection Criteri Bosch Security Systems Pte Ltd 39 Jalan Peninpin Singapore 177190 Access Groups Report Monday G0 Any 2000 IZIN F E Access Group Reader Schedule Floor List 1 Production Team amp Access Group Main Entrance 24 Are Timezoense Side Entrance Herrnal Schedule Production Dept Entry Reader Production Team A Schedule Return To Agges Groups Retur NOTICE All Access Groups are available for selection However Access Groups that are not defined with at least a Reader will generate an empty report If you are satisfied with the configuration and wish to print out a hardcopy click on the Print button located on the Toolbar of the web browser program Alternatively click on the File and select Print 4 To return to the Selection Criteria click on the Esturn To Selection Criteria kJjnk 5 To return to the Access Groups first web page cl
183. gout To log off from Access Easy for Master Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 198 en Accessing and Understanding Access Easy for Master Main Menu ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 18 4 Navigating Through Access Easy for Master page The following screen capture shows some sample pages indicating how you can navigate through Access Easy for Master software Home Page Activity Manual Control Card Database Menu groups Card Access Admin can buttons Access rights to some menu Items ef the group are disabled as features are incorporated inte Access Easy M aster User has access rights ta menu group Denoted by an Underlined item Clicking on an Underlined menu group would bring you to the first available access right menu item web page in the group Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Accessing and Understanding Access Easy for Master Main Menu en 199 Manual Control 4 Readeri Locked Clased 2 Reader 2 Locked Clased 3 Reader 3 Locked Closed 4 Reader4 Locked Closed 5 Reader 5 Unlocked Closed amp Reader 6 Unlocked Closed 7 Reader Unlacked Clased B Reader B LUinlacked Chased 9 Reader 9 Unlocked Closed 10 Reader 10 Unlocked Chased 1 11 Reader 11 Unlocked Closed li 12 Reader 12 Unlocked Closed li 13 Reader 13 Unlocked Closed
184. guide you through the settings that are needed on your Mac in order to dial into the Access Easy for Master 4 Firstly you will need to change the IP address of your Mac which you intend to use to connect to Access Easy for Master via modem to a different network segment For exam ple the Access Easy for Master having a IP address of 129 2 0 41 and the subnetmask is 255 255 255 0 the dial in Mac could have any IP address but the subnetmask must not be 255 255 255 0 it could be 255 255 0 0 or 255 0 0 0 After changing the IP address of your dial in Mac remember to reboot the Mac before proceeding to the next step Select Control Panels from the apple menu and from the Control Panels sub menu select TCP IP Refer screenshot below Chooser Control Panels If Favorites Er FanStatus 4 Graphing Calculator 3j Internet Access b EA Jigsaw Puzzle Key Caps E gt Memory DR EB Network Browser Note Pad A Recent Applications Recent Documents Bj Recent Servers P rm Remote Access Status Scrapbook a Sherlock amp SimpleSound Wy Stickies ow Energy Saver Extensions Manager File Exchange File Sharing Flavorsavers General Controls Internet Keyboard Launcher Location Manager MacLinkPlus Setup CW Memory Menu cript Menuscript PPC Modem Monitors tr Sound Mouse Numbers POFWriter Shortcut Quicklime Settings Remote Access Speech Startup Disk TEP AFP
185. h the database backup operation 4 During backup the message Database backup in progress will appear on the screen Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Database Backup en 119 5 Once the backup is complete a new screen will appear as shown below Database Backuya Title ee File Size Bytes Perform Download db_tar gz 1081608 6 You could now save the db tar gz file to your local PC by clicking on the iE button 7 The File Download box will appear showing the file to be downloaded and the IP address of the Access Easy Master File Download xc 9 l You are downloading the File db tar gz from 129 2 1 88 Would you like to open the file or save it to your computer Save Cancel More Info W Always ask before opening this type of file 8 Click on Save to save the file to your local PC 9 The user will be prompted to choose a location and file name to save the file Save As El ES Save in E Desktop a 2 e ja My Computer ao Mu Documents Es Network Meighborhaad _ Central 45 Hw Pics PV Database R3 Pro pics Save as type winzip File Cancel us 10 When the download is completed the Download Complete box will appear Download complete mi x Download Complete Saved db tar gz from 123 2 1 88 Downloaded 1 03 MB in 3 sec Download ta E SwIND OW S SDesktopsdb tar gz Transfer rate 352 KB
186. h the settings that are needed on your PC in order to dial into the Access Easy for Master 1 Firstly you will need to change the IP address of your PC which you intend to use to con nect to Access Easy for Master via modem to a different network segment For example the Access Easy for Master having a IP address of 129 2 0 41 and the subnet mask is 255 255 255 0 the dial in PC could have any IP address but the subnetmask must not be 255 255 255 0 it could be 255 255 0 0 or 255 0 0 0 After changing the IP address of your dial in PC remember to reboot the PC before proceed ing to the next step 2 Now you will need to setup the dial in connection Click on Start button Select Pro grams Accessories Communications Dial up networking as shown below and click on Dial Up Networking LZ Accessones Communications HME Dial U p Networking 4 Morton Antivirus gt E Entertainment Q3 Intemet Connection Wizard j Online Services gt Intemet Tools A NetMeeting StartUp gt B System Tools d Phone Dialer 3 You will be led to a screen as shown below Favorites Connections Help k E Xs Up Connection Double click on the Make New Connection icon to make a new connection Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Dial in User en 233 4 You will be led to a screen as shown below Hake New Connection Type a name for the comput
187. hange C On Duration On 2 Click on icon to submit the command Clicking on the icon will refresh the web page and reflect its new status NOTICE If the current status of the Output Point is Off the Manual Action will show 9 which means you could send a On command to this output when the 3 button is clicked Like wise if the Output Point is currently On the Manual Action will show off Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Card Assignment en 41 6 Card Assignment This Chapter describes the features of the Card Assignment function and the set up proce dure Card parameters are parameters that control the use of cards It contains information such as which card reader a cardholder can access at specified Schedule There will be some extra fields for user to configure additional card information like Department and User Fields Card Assignment consists of the following parameters gt Card Details Card Number Facility Code Card Format User Name Department User Field 1 User Field 2 Access Level gt a 7 2 2050 P Card Functionality a Whether cardholder is able to Arm Disarm Whether cardholder must abide by Holiday Schedules Whether to allow exit reader usage only in accordance with time schedules Whether Card Pin is required on keypad readers o o0 c Whether cardholder is One Time Access only with the Access Status as Valid or
188. he changed user name and password You may also set the number of illegal password attempts and the illegal attempts lockout duration as shown in the screen 4 The Number of illegal password attempts drop down box allows you to set the number of times the system will let you enter an illegal password before locking you out 5 The Illegal attempts lockout duration box allows you to set the duration to disable the dial in feature after a number of illegal password attempts as specified in step 3 6 Next click the save 999 button to confirm the changes and backup the Database now 7 Make sure that a 56K modem is connected to your Access Easy Controller and is powered up The modem must be connected to your telephone line to receive a dial in request Access Easy for Master will initialise the modem when it is re booted 8 Re boot the Access Easy for Master 9 Now your Access Easy for Master is ready to receive a dial in request NOTICE 1 The modem has to be power up and connected to the Access Easy Controller before the Access Easy Controller reboots Access Easy Controller will initialise the modem to auto answer mode If initialising is not done dial in will not be successful 2 Once initialised the modem will always go into auto answer mode when power up Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 238 en Dial in User Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller The following setup will
189. he button This will cause the Access Easy Master to replicate the Schedule to the rest of the Access Easy Controller gt TIoclear the entries click on the e button button operate during Sunday or Holiday leave the entries in these 3 fields unchanged as This will indicate to the Controller that these are to be ignored How to Generate a Schedule Report Once you have completed configuring the required Schedules a hardcopy can be printed out From the first page of the Schedules click on the link Schedules Report A screen as shown on the following page Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 84 en Schedules ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Schedules eport Generation Available Schedules zj Selected list of Schedules ES 2 Select the desired Schedule from the list and it will appear on the Selected list of Sched ules box as shown below If no Schedule is selected from the list all the available Sched ules with time settings will be included in the report Schedules Peport Generation Weekdays Schedule 3 To remove the selected schedule from the Selected list of Schedules select that sched zT d ule and click on the L i button 4 Click on the button for a print preview of the report The following screen capture shows an example of the Schedules Report NOTICE Only Schedule with time setting will be shown Bosch Security Systems Pte
190. he kind of access it has while the Card Functionality contains the settings of the operation and usage Card Details Card Details consists of the Card Number Facility Code Card Format User Name Card holder s Department Access rights and 2 configurable user fields User Field 1 and 2 as shown below Card 1 Facility Code 0 User Name Card Humber 1 User Field 1 User Field 2 Access Level Please select an Access Level Card Details Card Number This field contains the Card Number it is the number that is printed on the card itself Depending on the Card format this number could range from 1 to any number For example Standard 26 bit wiegand format cards could only have a range of numbers from O to 65535 Facility Code This code prevents unauthorised card with the same Card Number to access your system Some customers practise using a unique facility code that is controlled by the manufacturer This gives additional security over the entire system Ask your card supplier what is the facility code for your card Without this code the system will not be able to recognise your card Similar to the Card Number the range of numbers for this code is dependent on the Card for mat used For example Standard 26 bit wiegand format could have a range from O to 255 Card Format Access Easy Master is able to support up to a maximum of 15 user definable Card formats By default AEC Priority Format and Standard 26 bit F
191. he timeserver user has to bypass the firewall protection Follow steps 1 9 1 From the desktop select Start and look for Connect To and select show all connections CS My Dexcunmna rix Pee fee E L My Recent Documents 5 E mail arr Cea TA oat eB My Computer LX windows explorer Gi ny network laces um aor lp coran DE Ge cart eee Sucre ee Deiat ke Pac 1 oe L hb Srei E gu ri nters and Faxes er pirri Peterork Conc orn t3 Ek yia 1p Fete and Suppert arch bka Drive ee Search e EE E7 Pum 4 Loiun an tee An Programs B E j Tii i dr em Mie ores Coren fore ET Tre uta Device d Disi Terre ted Frigo aded Agen 5 di Comer Wrens Cras Decree resaled Ages Sy Presa pense et tenue For nate kek Thal LAN ar Figh Spessd Inher Cormeched Feo aded E ations LAN or FAgh Spesd Insee Dunaizhe i Wings inima F 4 Bepew fs connection B lere tha oore 3 The following screen will appear click on properties Local Area Connection Status Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 4 Click on Advanced Local Area Connection Properties Connect using NR Grosdeom Nettreme Gigabt Bhama L Gertigure _ This connection uses the following tems Tq Fie and Parier Sharing for Mieroscit Networks f rtemet Protecal TOP VIP Cm
192. hereby the output of a function block is to be triggered when one or more of the input states is low The output is set to high when one or more of the input states is low The following table depicts the NAND logic operation assuming only 2 inputs are used Input A j LO x uw Input B n Output Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 158 en Panels Admin ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 16 6 7 Interlock Man Trap 1 Interlock Operation All doors will remain closed and unlocked Opening any of the doors will cause all other doors to be locked until the opened door returns to the closed position In Access easy controller a maximum of 5 doors is configurable Examples of such applications are darkrooms laboratories clean rooms airlock rooms X ray or other treatment rooms The figure below shows an illustration of Interlock Operation for 2 doors The timing diagram below gives a graphical description of the function Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Input A Input B Input C Input D Input E Enable Activate all output Qutput A Output B Output C Output 0D Output E Interlockindictation onen BENMNMBMBMNE NI E Lr rrr Tgog dua c ied omm O EN Oa EE E tape BN omen EBBMBERDPESIS cea ILL EE Ea dE E g g open LL gd gr gd gr grad cel eV tf
193. i elis resedit el gr E DERE e ve a nemak connections hub BITES ESTIS Pe Seve Gla iy deraut connecta SCITTESTE aerate Taare p ETON spete secun Chen behae aiaia 5 Under the Connections tab click on the LAN Settings button The LAN Settings dialog box appears Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 272 en APPENDIX F Initial Setup To Access Easy Controller ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Local Area Network LAH Settings m Advanced 6 Click on the Advanced button The Proxy Settings dialog box appears pazos e 7 Enter the default P address for the Access Easy for Master in the Exceptions edit field as shown above 8 Ifthe IP Address of the Access Easy for Master s has been assigned continue to enter the address in the Exceptions edit field separate each Address by a semicolon The next screen capture shows the Default IP Address for Access Easy for Master and three assigned Access Easy for Master IP Addresses 129 3 0 202 129 3 0 203 and 129 3 0 204 Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller APPENDIX F Initial Setup To Access Easy Controller en 273 Use semicolons to separate entries 9 Click on the OK button repeatedly to exit the Internet Options setting 10 Close the Control Panel 33 4 For Macintosh Users 1 Launch the Internet Explorer for Macintosh pu I v Web Browser
194. ices And Cardholders For Report Generation for informa tion on selecting the criteria 2 The Report Generation can only generate 2000 records each time Users will be warned by a message box to reduce the range of the Date and Time selection if the records exceed 2000 The following sections will provide a step by step guide to configuring a criteria for report gen eration purpose 13 1 How to Set Criteria for Report Generation 1 Select the Report Generation hyperlink on the Left Pane and the Report Generation page will appear as shown below Activity Report Generation D Load Criteria D Audit j Bi DateTime Day Month Year Day Month Year From 23 oct 2002 To 11 oct 2008 Include Time in Processing C Continuous Timespan Hour Minute Second Hour Minute Second From E s a z To 0 s o 0 mn h zd uw i ai Lx Ta E Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Report Generation en 107 Now let us take a brief look at the screen layout of the Report Generation page Card Holders Events Devices Selection Selection Selection gt Load Criteria e Audit Log Report E P L Date Time Day Month Year Month Year Day From 23 Oct 2002 To i11 ct 2009 Include Time in Processing C Continuous Timespan Hour Minute Second Hour Minute Second From 0 o si o s To o mj o sj o H EC
195. ick on the Return To Access Groups jnk Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Panels Admin en 127 16 3 How to Setup Card Readers Card Readers parameters are the most essential parameters comprising of Reader Function Reader Options I O Settings PIN Code Settings Anti Passback APB Settings Dual Card Configuration vvvvvyv All Access Easy Controller Card Readers can be configured to work either as an Entry Reader an Exit Reader an Entry and Arm Disarm Reader or an Elevator Reader To Setup the Card Readers select the target Access Easy Controller and click on the Card Readers hyperlink The following screen will appear Panel Admin Panel 23 Card Readers amp i 4 2 1 Z 8 2 10 il 5 nit E he Li l i2 i5 1 Click on the Reader or the Description text to proceed A screen as shown below appears Card Readers Reader 1 Descriptian Main Entrance e Reader Options exi Lo Settings PIN Code Settings pp Anti Passback ex Dual Card APB Settings Configuration Entry Reader Exit Reader works with Entry and Arm Disarm zl Reader far Elevator Reader ES 2 Delete the default text and enter the new Description for the Reader 3 Click on the button 977 79 9 Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 128 en Panels Admin ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 16 3 1 Reader Function
196. ide in selecting the correct combination of selection for criteria In the case of this example we will not select the Card Holder selection as the activities we need to generate do not require this selection which is Door Forced Open Alarm from R amp D Main Entrance door NOTICE The Card Holder will not be taken into consideration during the generation of the report if the check box for Card Holders is not selected 9 For the activities that require the Card Holders selection to be included in the criteria follow step 10 to 14 10 Only cardholders ID indicated in the Selected List of Card Holders will be included in the criteria To add a cardholder s ID to the list you could search by Card or by Name 11 To search by Card ID enter the Card ID in the Card text box and click on the corre sponding button Access Easy Master will search through the card database and list out the cards that have the ID as shown on the following page Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Report Generation en 111 Activity Report Generation D Load Criteria D Audit Mili Card Holders Card 1365 Name List of Person Found Vincent Lim Selected List of Card Holders MAX 50 12 Click on the name of the cardholder to add to the Selected List of Card Holders NOTICE If there are 2 or more IDs that are the same but with different facility code or card
197. ierarchy of priorities for alarms 1 Click on Alarm Event Setup from the menu item list and you will see a screen as shown below The default screen is the Global Alarm Priority Setup screen Wetwork Settings view Activ in es Default Settings Card Format Set bate amp Time Alarms Event Setup larn Priority Set larn Event Condition Setup Alarm Instruction Message Setup Global Alarm Priority Setup Access Denied Highest Access Denied Passback Reo o g Access Denied Time APB l2 j Access Denied Wrong Fin Highest Alarm 3 Convertor Communication Failed Highest Dial In Invalid Password 2 Dial In Invalid User Name zx Dial in Lockout zl Disconnected from Server Highest Door Contact Input Fault Opened Highest 2 Select the priority of each type of alarm from the Priority list box The priority of the alarms can range from 1 to 128 with priority 1 as the highest priority and is denoted by Highest and priority 128 the lowest priority and is denoted by Lowest g 3 To complete the setting click on the MEL icon to save NOTICE View Activity will sort the alarms in the following order 1 Priority 2 Date and Time of occurrence Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 100 en Server Setup ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller How to Configure Individual Alarm Priority Setup This part of the setting allows you to define the hierarchy o
198. iew Activity Setting for details on setting the number of transaction records to view on screen NOTICE The View Activity web page is dynamic and will expand beyond the Number of Transactions To view setting to always accommodate transactions up to 70 records starting from the first not acknowledged alarm transaction up to the latest transaction When any of the alarm activity transactions is transacted an alerting audio tone is sent to the PC Please ensure that the PC s audio system is in working order and the volume is set to a reasonable level Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Activity en 23 4 1 1 How To View Activity Upon login to the Access Easy Master the View Activity page for Alarm transactions will be displayed However at any other page you could select View Activity from the Left Pane to view the activities amp Alarm B Valid B Restore E Alll Iime Attendance Alarm Activities i 113 Jul 2004 R amp D Dept Entry Reader Access Denied 2 11 07 00 11 Bill Clinton 1 1143 Jul 2004 Main Entrance Door Held Open 2 11 06 50 9 Dean Jones 1 13 Jul 2004 R amp D De pt Entry Reader Access Denied 2 11 06 15 7 Sachin Tendulkar 1 li Jul 2004 Main Entrance Door Held Open 2 11 06 14 5 Rivaldo 1 13 Jul 2004 R amp D Dept Entry Reader Access Denied 2 111 05 38 3 Andre Agassi 1 113 Jul 2004 Main Entrance Door Held Open 2 11 05 38 1 Michael Owen
199. ility Code field is configured in Panel Setup Default Settings If the code is different from the default then change it 3 Select the Card Format from the list 4 Select the Reader from the list If you want to Reset APB wrt all readers select All Read ers Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Panels Admin en 181 5 Click on the Q button to proceed If the command is executed successfully a message indicating APB reset by card amp zones with respect to Reader all Readers will be dis played 6 Click on the lt a button to return 16 9 2 How to reset APB based on Name wrt Reader All Readers Z 1 Enter a character a portion or the full name and click on the Gp button If a match is found that satisfies the entry a window will appear with the names in the Names found 2 list box For example enter John and click Gp button resulted in By Hame Search Gy Jahn Michael vincent Johny Lim Option Name Mames found 2 From the window select the appropriate name The selected name appears in the Search field 3 Select the Readers from the list If you want to Reset APB with respect to all readers select All Readers 4 Click on the button to proceed If the command is executed successfully a message indicating APB reset will be displayed 5 Click on the button to return 16 9 3 How to reset APB by All Card numbers wrt Reader All R
200. ill affect how the View Activities will arrange the alarms and how it will respond to the user when acknowledged The setup includes 1 Alarm Priority Setup 2 Alarm Event Condition Setup 3 Alarm Instruction Message Setup Consider this as an example You would like all the Door Forced Open alarm to be given the highest global priority The earliest Door Forced Open alarm will have to be acknowledged first before the rest of the alarms with lower global priority Furthermore you would like to group the doors in terms of their location such as R amp D Dept Production Dept etc These grouping will allow you to customize an Alarm Instruction Message for each group Hence when the operator acknowledges a Door Forced Open alarm of R amp D Dept group from the View Activity an instruction will be displayed on the screen as shown in the following screen shot e Alarm Instruction Details Microzolt Intemet Explorer Location R amp D Main Entrance User Name ten nn ee Alarm Description Door Forced Open Instruction This is a highest priority alarm Check the status of the alarm and call police if there is amp intrusion Available unacknowledge alarms 4 Acknowledge all alarms While acknowledging a Door Forced Open alarm of Production Dept a different instruction will be displayed on the screen as shown below 7 Alarm Instruction Details Microsoft Internet Explorer Location Production Entrance Use
201. ime Zone GMT 08 00 Singapore 12 6 1 How to Set the Date amp Time 1 Select the appropriate Hour Minute and Second from the list box 2 Dolikewise for the Day Month and Year field 3 Select the appropriate Time Zone from the Choose Time Zone drop down list box 7 4 Click on the button Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 94 en Server Setup Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller An additional function is implemented to allow user to maintain date and time synchronization with a timeserver With synchronization on all of Access Easy Controller user can ensure that events that happen in sequence on different controllers can be analysed correctly Enable NTP Time Server far synchronization Time Server IP address DMS 123 2 0 86 C Disable synchronization if time difference between AEC and Time Server is gt 15 minutes Synchronize with Time Server Now B Successfully synchronized on 7 Jul 03 00 13 o 1 Select Enable NTP Time server for synchronization and key in the IP address of the Timeserver PC NOTICE Refer to Appendix E on Setting up a Timeserver PC Time Server Address DNS input is the IP address of the PC being configured as a time server PC Access Easy Controller is only able to synchronize with a NTP time server and will sync at 3 A M daily automatically Auto Time synchronization at 3 A M is only logged at transaction however if u
202. ime periods pre defined Schedule that the cardholders can access There are 1024 programmable Access Levels In addition there are two more unique access levels They are the Full Access level that allows cardholders to access all readers at all times usually reserved for the President Chairman or Directors of the company and the Unused level that prohibits cardholder to access any reader at all times Access Level is implemented to simplify the process of assigning cardholder s access rights to each reader in each Access Easy Controller In a system where more than one Access Easy Controller are implemented to control the access of doors we will need to configure the card holder number into each and every one of the Access Easy Controller This is a very time con suming process With Access Easy Master we could configure cards for the cardholders by assigning them Access Levels Each Access Level could define the Access Groups that the cardholder belongs to in each Access Easy Controller It is highly recommended that detail planning be done before setting up the Access Levels 7 1 The Access Levels page To activate Access Levels click on Access Levels hyperlink from the main menu page The Access Levels screen will appear as shown below flecess Level Acci evel Report Full Access Lev el a F ce Lm Click on any of the Description ar Access Level to configure the Access Level Sta Horse Visitor Acc
203. ined Input Point 3 undefined Input Point 4 Undefined Input Point 5 Undefined Input Point amp Undefined Input Point 7 Undefined Input Point amp Undefined Input Point 9 Undefined Input Point 10 Undefined Input Point 11 Undefined Input Point 12 Undefined Input Point 13 Undefined Input Point 14 Undefined Input Point 15 2 3 4 cg O9 QD A dm e Disarmed Disarmed Cisarmed Disarmed Disarmed Disarmed Disarmed Cisarmed Disarmed Disarmad Cisarmed Disarmed Disarmed Dusarmed Disarmed L 777 9 DH FH BH No Change No Change No Change No Change Ho Change No Change No Change No Change Ho Change Ho Change No Change No Change No Change No Change C Arm How Alarm Zone 1 Arm How C rm Now Arm Now Arm How Arm Now Arm How Arm How Arm Mow Arm How Arm Now Arm How Arm How Arm Now Input Points that does nat belongs to any Alarm Zone Click on the appropriate link 91 15 or 8 177 Points Alternatively you can click on the or lt button Select the desired radio button s see NOTICE m to display the correct range of Input Click on either button to send the command The web page will refresh to reflect the new status NOTICE If the current status of the Input Point is Armed the Manual Action will shows C which means you could send a disarm command to this input when the Likewise if the Input Poin
204. ing Arm state if the door is unlocked by Schedule or manually from Door control page the alarm zone will be disarmed first before door is unlocked If the Reader is only used for Arm Disarm purpose user just has to assign the cardholder with Arm Disarm function without given access right to the Reader This will allow the cardholder to arm the Alarm Zone without pressing the O0 key To switch the Reader back to normal access card Reader press 0 on the Keypad after finish ing the Arm Disarm operation NOTICE In order for the Reader to work properly additional wiring is required Please consult your System Installer for advice Elevator Reader Similar concept of door access right assignment in other Readers is also implemented in the Elevator Reader floor assignment However Elevator Readers do not have the function Anti Passback APB Settings This is because it would be complicated to register a zone for the user after he has entered the eleva tor and flashed his card to the Elevator Reader since the elevator has exit to more than one floor You can consider the Elevator has more than one exit Besides without the function Anti Passback APB Settings the O Settings of Elevator Reader is also different from that of an Entry Reader and an Entry and Arm Disarm Reader Elevator Reader only has Floor Output Settings and Output Link compared to the Door Output Settings Door Input Settings and Output Link in Entry Reader and
205. ion Off is determined in the Duration field in Panels Admin Output Setup By default all the outputs in the system will be shown on the screen However if you want to view a specific Controller s outputs you could select it from Panels A11 Bl cil list down all the on line Controllers Selecting a Controller from the list will cause the screen to refresh with only the Output Points from the selected Controller Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 40 en Manual Control ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 5 3 1 How to Turn On Off Output Points 1 To activate the selected Output Point click the 9n or off icon Panels A11 Panel Name Central Office 1 Moton Detector 1 Simulator No Change C Off C Duration Off 2 Motion Detector 2 Simulator No Change C On C Duration On 3 Motion Detector 3 Simulator Off No Change C On C Duration On 4 Motion Detector 4 Simulator off No Change C On C Duration On 5 Moton Detector 5 Simulator Off f No Change C On C Duration On 6 Undefined Output Point 6 Off No Change C On C Duration On 7 Undefined Output Point 7 Off No Change C On C Duration On 8 Undefined Output Point 8 Off No Change C On C Duration On 9 Undefined Output Point 9 OR No Change C On C Duration On 10 Undefined Output Point 10 Off No Change C On C Duration On 11 Undefined Output Point 11 OR No Change C On C Duration On 12 Undefined Output Point 12 Off No C
206. is linked to an Input Point as a Status Output the sta tus will not be indicated here As this is a control operated by a user manually it has priority over the control set by the sys tem However the system will take over and resume normal operation once it encounters a valid Schedule Interval Before we begin we show an example to illustrate the operational condition The setting for Interval 1 is Start 0830hrs and End 1730hrs Interval 2 3 and 4 has no setting O830 b te Tdibts Output Status according to Output Off Output Off ochedule Manual Output Control command sent 1 n Output at D 3 hrs 3 Off Output at 1230hrs Z Off Input at O amp 00hrs 4 0n Output at 1315hrs OOOO rz 03304 te 1713117 zZ353rr Resultant Output Status nr3nirs OF004 rs 123Dirs d3i15lr Legend ulul Panis On OubulPomils art Notice that the system resumes normal operation as according to Schedule at O830hrs and 1731hrs Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 21 1 To activate Output Control Output Control en 209 There are various ways to activate the Output Control They are From any menu item page click on Output Control hyperlink From the View Activity page click on Output Control hyperlink From any of the menu items page of the Manual Control Group 1 2 3 en HB HGBHBHd Gu Tni amp M LR Simulation of Alarm Sensor 1 Simulabhon of Ala
207. ith the pre alarm function a user would be reminded with a slow beeping that the door he has just gained access is still open An example is he can set Pre alarm Warning before door held open alarm to 5 seconds so that he will be alerted to close the door on time before the Door Held Open Alarm The timing can range from O to 60 seconds NOTICE Address for Request to Exit Device and Door Contact is fixed and cannot be changed If the Input channel is disabled the address will not be shown Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Panels Admin en 137 16 3 6 Floor Output Settings For Elevator Reader Only When a reader is enable as a elevator reader it will not have any door input or output setting Instead it will be replaced by floor output settings A screen of the Floor Output Settings page is shown below Reader g Description Elevator Reader e Reader Functian e Reader Options e PIM Cade Settings re Dual Card Configuration Floor Relay Enable Timer 0 255 s seconds Floor Relay Floor List Output List Selecting Floor Relay Output Floor 1 Ei Motion Detector 1 Simulator Invalid Card Output Hot ssigned Fj JP Fa Rr d EE PINE il ote en io ER ur This section allows user to set any of the 32 programmable Output Point to the selected Floor 1 To configure the Selecting Floor Relay Output select a Floor from the Flo
208. k Setting to go to the Network Setting page The IP Address setting presented is the network setting for LAN 1 2 Highlight the default number in each of the IP Address s field and enter the appropriate number 3 Repeat the above step for the Panel s Netmask and Gateway 4 Click on the button see NOTICE NOTICE In order for the new IP Address to take effect the Controller needs rebooting Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Panel Setup en 217 23 3 Remote PC Addresses This allows user to set 3 dedicated personal computer s IP Address to allow user to down load upload parameters to Access Easy Controller using DB Backup utility program 23 3 1 To edit Remote PC Addresses 1 Highlight the default number in each of the IP Address s field and enter the appropriate number 2 Enter the PC Name as a complete word with no spacing in between You can use the underscore to denote spacing 3 Click on the button 23 4 Email Server Setup Information This section allows user to define the address of the Outgoing Mail SMTP server the SMTP port to use and the Access Easy for Master Email Address Name Click on the Email Server Setting link to goes to the Outgoing Mail SMTP server configuration page Panel Admin janes IP Address l72 16 10 B8 anel s EP Hetrask 2755 12595 2585 0 anels Gateway 172 16 10 1 11 Remote PD Address z
209. larm Instruction Undefined Alarm Instruction Undefined Alarm Instruction Undefined Alarm Instruction Undefined Alarm Instruction Undefined Alarm Instruction Undefined Alarm Instruction Undefined Alarm Instruction Select the appropriate Alarm Instruction Message as shown above NOTICE Alarm Instruction Messages are configured in the Alarm Instruction Message Setup Please refer to the next section Alarm Instruction Message Setup for details 8 Click the e to save and go to next page Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 104 en Server Setup Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 9 The next page that appears allows you to select the type of events that will display the Alarm Instruction Messages that you have just selected Sard Format Alarm Priority Setup Alarm Event Condition Seky Alarm Instruction Message Setup Alarm Event Condition 1 Description Undetined Event 1 Alarm Instruction Alarm Instruction for R amp D C All Alarms f Selected Alarms Available Alarms Selected list of Alarms Door Forced Open x 10 Choose the appropriate option button All Alarms All the alarms will use the same Alarm Instruction Message as config ured earlier Selected Alarms Only the Alarms in the Selected List of Alarms will display the Alarm Instruction Message as configured earlier In this example choose Selected Alarms as
210. lders to have extended duration for Door Strike and Keypad Timeout This feature will allow the cardholder to keep the door open for a longer time after a successful access grant before a Door Held Open alarm is activated The Keypad Timeout duration is also extended by the selected time on top of the normal Keypad Timeout duration An example of such an application is for the handicapped person who needs a lon ger time to access the door To select the extended time duration select the time in seconds on the list box 0 seconds beside the Extended duration for door access The range is from O to 255 sec onds Card Validation Dates This feature defines the start and end date parameters Card Validation Dates v Start Date Day 0i Month Jul Year 2004 aj W End Date Day 31 Month Dec Year 2004 aj The Start Date is the date from which the card is valid and End Date is the date from which the card is no longer valid The card will not be able to access any door before the Start Date and after the End Date NOTICE User must check the respective box for Start Date or End Date in order for it to be effective Dual Card Assignment This mode is useful if 2 cards are required to be presented in sequence to the Reader to unlock the door The First Card has to be presented first before the Second Card is presented else the door will not unlock A Don t Care Card can act as the first or second card In this setup here the us
211. le depicts the OR logic operation assuming only 3 inputs are used Input dM op 4 i l Uy p Input B Input C di Log eee cu a B ie Output 1 Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 156 en Panels Admin 16 6 4 16 6 5 Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller AND Logic This function is used in cases whereby the output of a function block is to be triggered when all the stated conditions are fulfilled In Advance I O Setup a maximum of 7 conditions is allowed The output is set to high when all of the stated inputs are set to high The following table depicts the AND logic operation assuming only 3 inputs are used Inputa d Uu a I l Input B a Le inputc BE Output XOR Logic This function is used in cases whereby the output of a function block is to be triggered when all the stated conditions are different In Advance I O Setup a maximum of 7 conditions is allowed Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 16 6 6 Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Panels Admin en 157 The output is set to high when all the stated inputs are at different states The following table depicts the XOR logic operation assuming only 2 inputs are used Input A Input B Output Input A d 0 Input B E NAND Logic This function is used in cases w
212. lick an either the Il UndetnnedSchedue 7 Schedule or Description to configure Fe IS ex FER FS FES 3 FS Ps Fe FS Fen Pe fs BE 2 Click on the 1 128 or 123 255 jnk to list the appropriate Schedule range 3 Click on the Schedule or the Description text to proceed A screen as shown below appears Global Schedules Schedule 1 Schedule Description Unde ined Schedule 1 Start End Start End Start End start s 4 Delete the default text and enter the Schedule Description 1 5 Click on the A button 6 Click on the gD button of the Day of Week DOW Regular Hol or Special Hol row This will enable the whole row for editing as shown on the following page Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 82 en Schedules ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Global Schedules Schedule 1 Schedule Description Schedule 1 Start End Start End Start End Start End ioc OBI TEE T 7 Click on the required field starting from Interval 1 Start and enter the appropriate time Global Schedules Schedule s 1 Schedule Description Schedul el Start End Start End Start End Start End Is mum Mombum seice rej ee mm eo fee ee mem m el ee pee FE ELON Rs e R7 Lom O7 D ma jm ii Boala wmjwm on omm pm m jea at oaia rv Du mmimm To copy the entries in Monday field to other D OW In this case Tuesday to Friday will h
213. lipdate d Juutomatac 12 Double click on Services icon ROB EN I Services Local a Sources Eemi Vaswer ODBC 9 l Damme Dietele 3T tl Display Folder Opto i i G 0 m m N v robes rast ere Fraereeesotk Local a um WHET Mirasolt HET Peloimence Pitona Web k 1 Frameveork 1 Manger 255 Startup Type LogOnas Sa Simple Mail Transpor ay Smart Card Sia Smart Card Helper amp amp SGLSERVERAGENT Sa Still Image Service Sia System Event Motific Sie Task Scheduler Sa TCP IP NetBIOS He ay Telephony Sia Telnet Sia Uninterruptible Powe Sa Utility Manager Sa VNC Server amp amp Windows Installer amp Windows Managem S Windows Managem windows Time Sa wireless Configuration Sa Workstation Sa World Wide Web Pu Transports Manages 4 Started Frovides su Tracks syst Enables a p Enables su Provides Te Allows a re Manages a Started Started Started Started Started Starts and c Installa rep Provides sy dines Sy Started Started ets the c EE au Provides ne Provides Ww Started Started Automatic Manual I anual Manual Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Manual Manual Manual Manual Automatic Manual Automatic Manual Auto matic Manual Automatic Automatic LocalSystem LocalS ystem Lacal5 ystem LocalSystem
214. ll OEIL I open a rb or rg ee D SA DA S ILL Og Gg G I Oo irri rit rr tt Locked Unitecked Locked Unlocked Locked Unbocke d Locked Pip pu Locked _ d Section 1 Section Z Software Manual Panels Admin en 159 Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 160 en Panels Admin Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Section 1 In Section 1 a leading edge from O to 1 is detected at Input A first This means that the door at A is opened This causes the door at A to be unlocked Output A Low and the rest of the doors to be locked Output High until door at A is closed The same applies when each door is opened in turn Enable is always high In Access easy controller configuration Enable can be configured as Always On Activate all output is always low In Access easy controller configuration Activate all output can be configured as Always Off Section 2 In Section 2 a leading edge from O to 1 is first detected at Input A From Section 1 we know that the door at A is opened and this causes the door at A to be unlocked Output A Low and the rest of the doors to be locked Output High until door at A is closed But before doorat A is closed someone tries to open door at B He cannot open the door at B as it is locked Output B High as door at A has not been closed back to original position 2 Man Trap Operati
215. ll Readers at all times usually reserved for the President Chair man or Directors of the company and the Unused group that prohibits cardholder to access any Reader at any time These 2 Access Groups are not listed in the Access Groups page They can be selected when the user goes to Access Levels page Access Group is implemented to simplify the process of assigning cardholder s access rights to each Reader Usually a group of cardholders can access the same group of Readers and usu ally using a common Schedule Rather than assigning each Reader to one of the cardholder and going through the same steps repeatedly grouping of Access Group is implemented It is highly recommended that detail planning be done before setting up the Access Groups Each Access Group can configure up to 16 Readers with each Reader linked to a Schedule To Setup the Access Groups select the target Access Easy Controller and click on the Access Groups hyperlink The following screen will appear Panel Admin Panel 3 Access Groups 9 1 Access Groups Report sam Access Group isl iL ro Undefited Access Group Undefined Access Group 5 ndefined Access Group 6 Click on this link to list Access Group 126 254 n etinegd n rod 4 Indefined Access Growe Undefined Access Group 5 Undefined Access Group 10 Undefined Access Group 11 A Click on this link ta list Access Group 1 127 Undefined Access
216. low through the procedures to set the IP Address of the PC NOTICE The example described here is based on Windows 98 and Internet Explorer 5 Differences might appear for the dialog box displays or description if other version or different operating system is used However the principle of setting is the same Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller APPENDIX F Initial Setup To Access Easy Controller en 265 1 Click on the ista button followed by Settings Control Panel ia Se m 2 Double click on the Network icon the Network dialog box appears Network Ei Configuration Identification Access Contra The following network components are installed Um Client for Microsoft Nebwarks mn m Client for Hetw are Networks Sf Dial Up Adapter zi Microsoft PPP aver OTM Adapter af Microsoft Virtual Private Networking Adapter Use this scroll bar to 4 view the installed network components Add Henare Properties Primary Metwaork Logor Client for Microsoft Networks Eile and Print Sharing 3 Use the Scroll Bar to look up for TCP IP from the list as shown in the following diagram However if this component is not found proceed from step 4 to step 7 to install it else skip to step 8 Network E Ei Configuration Identification Access Control M Look for component similar ta this The following network components are in
217. ls on the same date year after year e g New Year day and Christmas Day need to be defined only once While those holiday dates that vary from year to year will have to be updated at the beginning of the year and shall be selected to Yes User can use this feature to ease the updating of holiday dates every year by allocating for example the first 10 Holiday for fixed holiday dates and the rest of the Holiday for variable holiday dates In this way user just has to update on the variable holiday dates and skip the fixed holiday dates at the beginning of the year Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 76 en Holidays 10 1 Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 gt Tocancel the operation click on the ii ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller How to configure Holidays 1 From the Left Pane menu select Holidays A screen as shown below appears Reqular Holidays Special Holidays Hali R 1 iw Teor r Lunar New Year 3 Christmas Dav Regular Hold aac pala r 1 Tasted EEUUIST rons t Click an either the Holiday Indatinad Banus E or Description to configure 2 idav 9 10 Undefined Regular Holidav 10 11 ndefined R lar Holi l ie Undefined Regular Holiday 12 13 fined Regul i 14 Undefined Regular Holiday 14 15 Undefined Regular Holiday 15 16 of define d Regul ar nno L av IU 17 Undefined Regular Holiday 17 18 Undefined Regular Holiday 19 ndafined Regular Holiday 19 20 Undefined
218. materials accompanying the SOFTWARE PRODUCT LIMITED WARRANTY BOSCH SECURITY SYSTEMS warrants that a Access Easy Master Controller Software and b Access Easy Master Controller Access Control Panels and all input output modules manufactured only by BOSCH SECURITY SYSTEMS will perform adequately in accordance with the accompanying User s Manual and will be free from defects in materials and workmanship under its intended normal use and service for a period of 1 year from date of purchase CUSTOMER REMEDIES BOSCH SECURITY SYSTEMS S entire liability and your exclusive remedy shall be at BOSCH SECURITY SYSTEMS S option either a return of the price paid or b repair or replacement of the hardware or software that does not meet BOSCH SECURITY SYSTEMS S limited warranty and which is returned to BOSCH SECURITY SYS TEMS with a copy of your purchase receipt This limited warranty becomes void if failure of the hardware or software has resulted from abuse accident or misapplication NO LIABILITY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES Under no circumstances shall BOSCH SECURITY SYSTEMS or its suppliers be liable for any other damages whatsoever includ ing without limitation damages for business interruption loss of business profits or other pecuniary loss arising out of the use of or inability to use this BOSCH SECURITY SYSTEMS product BOSCH SECURITY SYSTEMS total liability under any provision of this agreement shall be limited to the amount actuall
219. me Based APB minutes C Activate Soft APB violations will be logged but access exit granted Entry Zone Undefined Exit Zone Undefined Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Panels Admin en 143 Similarly for Entry Reader 3 the Entry Zone will be selected as Zone 2 and Exit Zone selected as Zone 3 as shown below APB deactivated C Activate Time Based APB Timer setting for Time Based APB minutes Activate Soft APB violations will be logged but access exit granted 16 3 9 Dual Card Configuration Panel Admin Panel 3 Card Readers Reader 1 Description Main Entrance ie Reader Function eh Reader Options eb O Settings ie PIN Code Settings ie Anti Passback APB Settings e Dual Pind Mode disabled C After using 2 card to initiate the access the system will switch back to single card access m i 2 mS BT X2 F In the Dual Card Configuration the Reader can either be configured as Dual Card Mode dis abled After using 2 card to initiate the access the system will switch back to single card access or Dual Card access at all time C Dual Card access at all time A screen of the Dual Card Configuration page is shown above Dual Card Mode disabled If this mode is selected it means that no 2 cards are needed to activate the Reader After using 2 card to initiate the access the system will switch back to single card ac
220. n shot below Server IP Address 123 rem fes Server IP Netmask 255 255 o t o Server Gateway 122 2 D 254 Remote Clients Address Sea na ese se EEE en RON ee EWPBUSNMS quU UMEN UR BUE MURS UE M E UN Y f IPAddress FHFHFHEHEHEHEHESESESESHSHIHSHEHHBEBEHSHER I ribs EA nd HEHEHFBEHEBERHSESHSESH HH 1 t dues B fo h37 PC Named i29 2 n Ba PC Name ahas pD BS PC Name3 Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 190 en How to Configure the Access Easy Master IP Address 17 2 17 2 1 Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Configure the network settings for Access Easy Master by setting the appropriate IP address m subnet mask and gateway Click on the icon at the bottom of the web page to save the new setting NOTICE Access Easy Master needs to be rebooted before the new IP address setting takes effect For Macintosh Users Changing the Macintosh s IP address Setting the IP address of the Macintosh is rather simple However if you have doubt do ask your network administrator to assist you The purpose of changing the IP address of the Macintosh is to allow it to access the Access Easy Master which has a default IP address of 129 2 0 42 factory setting If you do not change the IP address of the Macintosh you will not able to access the Access Easy Master at all Hence it is important to have your Macintosh pre configured with the
221. n the user s PC Users can then make changes to the file and import the amended file into the system How to Export the Card Database 1 Onthe first page of Card Assignment click on the Export button located below the Add Card function as shown below Card Ossignment Search By Card S Batch Cards js Search By Marne john ey Select 4 CSV File Browse Import Export Add Card j Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 52 en Card Assignment ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 2 The File Download box would appear as shown below File Download 3 Click on the Save button to save the card database to your computer or click on the Open button to open the file 4 If the Save button is clicked after the download is successful the Download Complete box appears as shown below Download complete 4 S Tx EI 5 Click on the Close button to close the box or click on the Open button to open the downloaded file A sample of the CSV file saved is as shown below ped Gabe A E sal n T EPOTOT Sy a a H 773 ao ahd ia ae Cad Facility CoCand Form User Mamas Departmer User Field User Field Access La Binay Length AmvDisan Hobday ScExit Sch Enable En 1 oO 2 Mati Brys 1 hexitra0001 25 255 1 i 1 2 2 Krshnan 1 hexi4DOOI 2b 255 1 1 1 3 2 Ali Ahmad D 1 hexiiz 000r 25 255 1 1 1 4 2 Santokh S LU 1 honago 26 25 1 1 1 5
222. ncoded Format PFFFFFFFFCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCP Parity Format 1 BEBBEBBBEBEEEXXXXXXXXXXXXO Parity Format 2 EXXXXXXXXXXXXBBBBEBBBBBEBB Legend Porp Parity bit F or f Facility bit Sore Card Number Eore Even Parity bit Dorog Odd Parity bit B or b Blank orx Parity bit Location D Binary O 1 Binary 1 If you have Card Format that has more than 2 Parity Format maximum is 8 click on the button to configure them else just save the configuration TIP To best distinguish between the alphabet O and the number O it is recommended that you use all lower case entry Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 90 en Server Setup 12 4 12 4 1 12 5 Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller View Activity Setting This setting affects the number of transaction records to view on screen for the View Activity menu However should there be alarms that are not acknowledged by the user the View Activity records will expand to show all transactions from the first not acknowledged alarm up to the latest transaction In simple words the View Activity is dynamic and will show those not acknowledged Alarm transactions up to the latest transactions The number of records to view ranges from 10 to 70 in steps of 10 records Click on View Activity Setting from the menu item list and you will see a screen as shown below Number of Transactions T View 70 How to Edit View Activity S
223. nitoring computer is required Connecting to Access Easy for Master Before the Access Easy for Master can be access it must be configured properly and inte grated to the existing computer network As this integration is fairly complex and requires knowledge on networking it is the responsi bility of the System Installer to working closely with your company s Network Administrator to do the initial set up However for general knowledge a description is presented in Appendix F For users accessing the using their own computer please read up on the section Setting to be made to the Web Browser Logging onto Access Easy for Master A working knowledge of Windows or Macintosh and the standard web browser program either Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator and the ability to manoeuvre with a mouse pointer is required to complete the appropriate screen To get connected to Access Easy for Master run your web browser program and key in the Access Easy for Master s URL address followed by the Enter key The following screen capture shows example of some typical web browser page with the default URL address for the Access Easy for Master The outlook of the screen might differ from what is shown here this is largely due to the software version in use Enter URL address for Access Easy far Master ey Nut Home Search Frodo History B This is a sample of how the screen would look like for user using Inte
224. nnections Forms amp utoComplete LJ Show server messages Max connections Qr AutoFill Profile Receiving Files Offline Browsing Q Download Options i Automatically connect to the Internet if a page is not cached Q File Helpers 5 Q Security If you are accessing the Internet through a network at your company or organization you can select internal servers gateways to Q Security Zones manage Inter net eccess Contact your network administrator for Ratings more information Q Advanced Enabled Disabled Forms AutoFill Protecel a Q Forms AuteComp lete i i DE Method Normal AutoFill Profile lt Receiving Files Morses ma Port bovis Option Coo RR oL EE 1 Q Cookies Het k Use proxy for local servers v Hetwor M enden Q Protocol Helpers List the sites you want to connect ta directly bypassing the proxies setabove Puta space or comma between each site Q Proxies a ae em A a Q Site Passwords E mail Q General ia 6 Enter the Access Easy Master default IP Address into the box as shown above IP Addresses enter here will bypass the proxies and connect directly Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller How to Configure the Access Easy Master IP Address en 193 7 Ifthe IP Address of the Access Easy Controllers have been assigned continue to enter the addresses in the fi
225. nted by 2 Alarm Zone 4 3 represented by 3 All Alarm Zones 5 represented by 5 User cannot arm disarm any alarm zone 255 O indicates that the check box Cardholder must abide by holiday Holiday Schedule schedules To work in conjunction with Reader Options is NOT checked 1 indicates that the check box is checked Exit Sch O indicates that the check box for Allow exit reader usage only in accordance with time schedules is NOT checked 1 indicates that the check box is checked Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Card Assignment en 55 Enable Enroll O indicates that the check box for new enrolment for the reader schedules is NOT checked 1 indicates that the check box is checked O indicates that the check box Cardholder with one time access only is NOT checked 1 indicates that the check box is checked One Time Access Card PIN O indicates that the check box for Card PIN is required on keypad readers in Access Easy Master is NOT checked 1 indicates that the check box is checked The number in the Extended column indicates the extended dura tion for Door Strike and Keypad Timeout For example O indicates that there is no extended duration for Door Strike and Keypad Tim eout 10 indicates that there is an extended duration of 10 seconds for Door Strike and Keypad Timeout for the cardholder Extended Start Date
226. ntrol en 203 20 Input Control The Input Control is one of the menu items of the Manual Control Group It allows user to check the status of all the Input Points assigned to specific Alarm Zones and to send a com mand to Arm Disarm the Zone manually As this is a control operated by a user manually it has priority over the control set by the sys tem However the system will take over and resume normal operation once it encounters a valid Schedule Interval Before we begin we show an example to illustrate the operational behaviour The setting for Interval 1 is Start O830hrs and End 1730hrs Interval 2 3 and 4 has no setting Schedule Interval 1 nua 0830 1730 2459 Alarm one Status according ta Alarm one Alarm Zona Alarm Zona Schedule Armed Disarmed Armed Manuallnput Control command sent 1 Disarm Zone at 7 3 3 Arm one at 1230 1 Arm Zone at D 3D 4 Disarm Zone at 1315 nnn 0830 1730 2959 Resultant Alarm fone Status 0730 0800 1230 1315 Legend Al gull Pone wiihn be Aarm Zone are Disarmed All npul Panis wiihin Ins Ham Zore are Armed Notice that the system resumes normal operation as according to Schedule at 0830hrs and 1731hrs Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 204 en Input Control ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 20 1 To activate Input Control There are various ways to activate the Input Control They are 1 From any menu item pag
227. nts en 5 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 17 17 18 18 18 19 20 22 22 23 26 28 28 30 31 32 33 36 36 37 40 41 42 42 AT AT 48 51 51 51 56 57 57 Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 6 en Table of Contents 6 4 6 5 fod 1 2 7 3 8 1 8 1 1 8 1 2 9 1 9 1 1 9 2 10 10 1 10 2 11 11 1 11 2 11 3 12 12 1 12 1 1 12 2 12 2 1 12 3 12 3 1 12 4 12 4 1 12 5 12 9 1 12 5 2 12 6 12 6 1 12 7 12 7 1 12 7 2 12 7 3 12 7 4 12 8 Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 How to Use Search Function How to Generate Card Assignment Report Access Levels The Access Levels page How to Configure Access Levels How to Print Access Level Report Users Setup Setting User Access How to Change User Name and Password How to Change the Access to Menu Items Panel Setup How to Add an Access Easy Controller How to download database to controller How to download database to Panel Holidays How to configure Holidays How to Generate a Holidays Report Schedules System Behaviour when using Schedule How to Configure Schedules How to Generate a Schedule Report Server Setup Network Settings How to Edit Network Settings Auto Logout Timer How to set the Auto Logout Timer Card Format How to Configure New Card Format View Activity Setting How to Edit View Activity Setting Company Profile How to Edit Company Profile How to Edit the Department List Set Date amp Time How to Set the Date amp Time Default
228. nts to trigger lockout high button 5 Enter the Number of illegal attempts prior to lockout The default is set to 3 6 Enter the Duration between illegal attempts It ranges from O to 255 seconds 7 Enter the Lockout duration It ranges from O to 255 seconds light the event and click on the In the above example the user will be lockout after the 3rd attempt when he uses an Invalid Card to access the Reader 3 times within 10 seconds He would not be able to access the Reader for 30 seconds meaning the Reader will lock him out for 30 seconds However if he only attempted 2 times with an invalid card the Reader will reset the illegal attempt counter 10 seconds after the very first time the user uses an invalid card to access the Reader NOTICE Once Reader is lockout it will not be accessible by any cardholder Only after the lockout duration can the reader be used again 16 3 3 Scheduling Options The Access Easy Controller can be programmed to activate or de activate the reader based on pre programmed Schedules This is particularly useful if the reader is used for controlling door access and the door is required to be unlocked during certain period of the day but to be locked back at different time period for the same day The above scenario is a typical operation of a Main Entrance Door of a building During the time when staff normally come to work you might want to unlock the door throughout the office working hours and autom
229. o MS Pc Nane3 This configuration allows user to enter the Server IP Address Server IP Netmask and Server Gateway In addition user can define 3 Remote Clients Address for ftp file transfer protocol purposes Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 86 en Server Setup 12 1 1 12 2 12 2 1 12 3 Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller How to Edit Network Settings 1 Delete the default number in each of the Server IP Address Server IP Netmask and Server Gateway field and enter the appropriate number 2 Click on the UL icon to save the settings see NOTICE NOTICE In order for the new IP Address to take effect the Access Easy Master needs rebooting Auto Logout Timer This configuration allows user to set the timer for the Access Easy Master software to Logout automatically if it detects no user activity Default setting is 1 hour Click on Auto Logout Timer from the menu item list and you will see a screen as shown below NOTICE This Timer setting is applicable to all menu items except View Activity How to set the Auto Logout Timer 1 Select the Hour and Minute from the list box 2 Click on the i icon to save your setting Click on the icon to clear the setting Card Format This setting allows user to customise the Access Easy Master to accept up to 16 different types of Wiegand card format inclusive of the BOSCH ADC Proprietary Card Format and
230. o view the current status of all assigned Input Points and the respective Alarm Zone the Input Points belongs to NOTICE Only Input Points that are not controlled specifically based on Schedule will be shown on the web page Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Input Control en 205 Description provides the grouping of the Input Point if any The horizontal strip in blue pro vides the Alarm Zone to which the Input Points belong The Alarm Zones are separated by a blue line Independent Input Points do not belong to any Alarm Zone In this case Input Point 2 belongs to Alarm Zone 1 Input Point 1 is an independent input point The table below describes the possible grouping of the Input Point Alarm Zone 1 Input Points in Alarm Zone 1 are displayed together They are to be Alarm Zone 2 Input Points in Alarm Zone 2 are displayed together They are to be pens emetideumedtae o o ASOS Alarm Zone 3 Input Points in Alarm Zone 3 are displayed together They are to be pers irme amarmos taggen o e oS Alarm Zone 4 Input Points in Alarm Zone 4 are displayed together They are to be pes imed asama sagaen o aO Independent Input These are Independent Input Points which can be armed disarmed Current Status column provides us with the current input point status The table below describes the possible status of the Input Point The respective Input Point is Armed Disarmed Low The re
231. on All doors are normally closed and locked Unlocking any door by reader causes the other doors to be incapable of being unlocked In Access easy controller a maximum of 5 doors is configu rable Examples of such applications are restricted darkrooms laboratories clean rooms airlocks showers money counting rooms and computer rooms The figure below shows an illustration of Mantrap for 2 doors Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller The timing diagram below gives a graphical description of the function Input A Input B Input M Input D Input E Enable Activate all output Qutput A Output B Output C Output 0D Output E Interlockindictation Section 1 T i Ss E S S S I S Locked unlocked Lock ed Uu nlocke d Locked unlocked Locked Section 1 Section Z Panels Admin en 161 In Section 1 a leading edge from O to 1 is first detected at Input A i e someone presents his card at reader for door A This means that door A will be unlocked Output A Low and the rest of the doors will be incapable of being unlocked Output High The same applies when card is presented to the readers at the other doors in turn Enable is always high In Access easy controller configuration Enable can be configured as Always On Activate all output is always low In Access easy controller configuration Activate all output can be configured as Alwa
232. one The Address for Door Contact is fixed and cannot be changed Input It defines the physical input on the Reader board The input channels are applicable to Request to Exit device and Door Contact Input channel assignment for devices connected in relation to Reader is fixed and cannot be changed However user can disable the Input chan nel by selecting None None This setting will disable the Input channel If the door contact is ignored there will not be any alarms like Door Held Open or Door Forced Open on that particular reader Schedules and holidays will be used to shunt door contact An additional feature is the enabling schedules and holidays to be used for shunt door con tact If a schedule is selected during the time interval the door contact will be ignored This is the same as setting the door contact to None If the door contact is ignored there will not be any alarms like Door Held Open or Door Forced Open on that particular reader Door Forced Open Alarm delay duration This is to facilitate some special exit requirement For example a handicap user will need a longer time to access the open door than a normal user does This can also be used to prevent Door Forced Open false alarm due to interference at the cables Enter the timing in seconds at the Door Forced Open Alarm delay duration if desired The tim ing can range from O to 255 seconds Pre alarm Warning before door held open alarm W
233. onfiguration of the Card Format is carried out under the Server Setup Card Format Only Card Formats that have been con figured will appear in the drop down list box By default BOSCH ADC Proprietary and Standard 26 bit Format is pre configured into the system 5 Select the Access Level for the card in the Access Level field Only Access Levels that have at least one Controller selected will appear in the Access Level drop down box 6 Enter the number of card s to add in the Number of Cards field For this example enter 100 7 Click on the below appears 8 Ifthe operation is successful a message Batch operation completed as shown below icon When the add operation is in progress a message as shown appears 9 Click on the the screen to return to Batch Cards menu automatically icon to go back to the Batch Cards menu or wait for a few seconds for 10 Click on the icon to return to the first page of Card Assignment Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 50 en Card Assignment ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller How to Add a Batch of Cards with Reference to an Existing Card This function allows addition of a range of card numbers with data entries copied from a refer ence card number All card number s added will be copied with the data parameters of the reference card NOTICE Parameters such as Facility Code Card Format User Name and Access Level will not be cop ied
234. onfigure Manually IF Address 129 2 0 40 Subnet mask 292 295 0 0 Router address Search domains Mame serwer addr 3 Enter the P Address and the Subnet mask as shown above This will be the Macintosh s IP Address for this initial set up 4 Click on the Save button when prompted This message will appear when you attempt to close the dialog box save changes to the current configuration Saving the changes may interrupt any TCP IP services currently established 17 2 2 Settings to be made to the Web browser 1 Launch the Internet Explorer for Macintosh 2 From the Toolbars click on Preferences 3 Under Web Browser select Advanced see diagram below Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 192 en How to Configure the Access Easy Master IP Address ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 4 Select Update pages Always for Cache Internet Explorer Preferences History l Web Browser ii Browser Display web Content Remember the last C E places wisited Cache Home Search Language Fonts Update pages Once per session 2 Never Always Subscriptions Size pi HE Empty Now Jawa Security Location MS Internet Cache an volume Macintosh HB Security Zones ooo0000000 Ratings Change Location Q Advanced E fivaneed m Connections x Forms AutoFill e C Support multiple co
235. ontrol operated by a user manually it has priority over the control set by the sys tem However the system will take over and resume normal operation once it encounters a valid Schedule interval For configuration of system control please refer to Panels Admin Output Setup Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 38 en Manual Control ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Before we begin we show an example to illustrate the operational condition The setting for Interval 1 is Start O830hrs and End 1730hrs Interval 2 3 and 4 has no setting Dae3 hrs 1r31hrz y A oor omon Noe Ki x oe ee CU Output Status NSS according to schedule N N Manual Output Control 1 n Output at Of 3 hrs 3 Off Gutput at 1 23Uhrs onto 2 Off Input at O800hrs 4 On Output at 1315hrs command sent OOhrs Oe30hrs 1Faihrs 235 9hrs mme RSS ON S Output Stat S SS N OF S0hrs O800hrs 1230hra 1315hrs Legend OrpatPohlit E Du NM Orpat Polit e ON Notice that the system resumes normal operation as according to Schedule at O830hrs and 1731hrs Now let us continue with the Output Control 1 From the Access Easy Master main menu page click on Output Control Access Easy Master Bj Alor Quad Restore all Time Attendance ALAM AGCTIVITIBS X zu E CS c uem e Dec 2008 mare 2 Access Denied g eet 11 40 41 Card Nurnber 10 1 i3 Dee 2005 Reader J Invalid Card 1 11
236. oor Unlocked AERE Cardholders FE E nud Selected Omit Output Cardholders All Readers Inputs and Output Point IEEE All Readers Selected Omit Readers All Input Points Selected Omit Input All Output Points Selected Omit Door Momentarily Unlocked Duration On Duration Off EIL NN er eee auine i eves coke ft xp p 2 LI ee ee Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 246 en APPENDIX B Configuring Alarm Events ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 29 APPENDIX B Configuring Alarm Events 0 Beim Cardholders Selected Omit Readers Selected Omit Input Selected Omit Output All Cardholders x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt All Readers Inputs and Output Point All Output Points BES ERIE CCIE nud All Input Points Selected Omit Cardholders es Duress Access Denied Access Denied Passback ERE E XN L5 E SE ETE ESSE EEE Access Denied Timed t APB Ear E HAE EXE EJE EXE Access Denied Wrong PIN Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 30 30 1 30 2 APPENDIX C Activity Transactions APPENDIX C Activity Transactions en 247 This appendix list the various Activity transactions found within each category Alarm Activity Ns memo 770000000 S Access Denied woen ooo 8 Access Denied Timed APB DELILLLL NN a Resto
237. or List Select an Output Point from the Output List 3 Click on the button to add the selected Output Point to the selected Floor The selected items would appear on the Floor Relay list box as shown below Each Floor and Output Point can only be selected once Floor Relay Floor 1 Motion Detector 1 Simulator 4 To delete any selected items from the Floor Relay list box highlight the item and click on the L button 5 To configure the Floor Relay Enable Timer delete the default timing in seconds and enter a new timing for it The default timing is 5 seconds Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 138 en Panels Admin 16 3 7 Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller In an Entry Reader and Entry and Arm Disarm Reader it allows user to set any of the 32 pro grammable Output Point to Door Forced Alarm Output Door Held Alarm Output and Invalid Card Output By default all the 3 are set to Not Assigned Donr Forced Alarm Output Not Assigned Door Held Alarm Output Not Assigned Invalid Card Output Not Assigned However in an Elevator Reader this section only allows user to set any of the 32 programma ble Output Point to Invalid Card Output By default it is set to Not Assigned Invalid Card Output Not Assigned PIN Code Settings Panel Admin Panel 3 Card Readers Reader i Description Main Entrance B Reader Function Reader O
238. ormat is pre configured into the system Refer to Chapter 12 Server Setup Card Format for details on the configuration of card formats User Name This field contains the name of the Cardholder Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Card Assignment en 43 Department This field contains the department in which the Cardholder belongs to Access Easy Master is able to support up to a maximum of 255 user definable departments Refer to Chapter 12 Server Setup Company Profile How to Edit the Department List for details on the configura tion of departments User Field 1 amp 2 These two fields are user configurable fields it can be configured to hold non operation data such as mobile number home contact number office extension number destination staff ID etc Refer to Chapter 12 Server Setup Default Settings How to Edit the User Definable Fields for details on the configuration of User Field 1 and 2 For example User Field 1 is configured as Mobile number User Field 2 is configured as Home contact number On the Card Assignment page user will see User Field 1 replaced by Mobile number and User Field 2 replaced by Home contact number as shown below Card amp 1 Facility Code 0 Card Format AEC Priority Format User Name Card Number 1 Department m Access Level Please select an Access Level bd Card Details Access Level In order to control the accessibility o
239. osch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 172 en Panels Admin ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller The function of Select By Card and Select By Name is similar to the Search By Card and Search By Name function respectively Please refer to the explanation in Chapter 6 Card Assignment How to Use Search Function for detail 3 Select the Cardholder and click on the button The selected cardholder appears in the List of Selected Cardholders window Repeat step 3 if you have other cardholders to put on the list see NOTICE below 16 8 5 NOTICE The List of Selected Cardholders window has a limit of up to 80 entries 4 To delete selected Cardholder s click on the Cardholder s name in the window followed by the button Repeat step 4 if necessary _ 5 When you finish with your selection click on the button Events This web page allows user to configure the last Events of the three items for the AND opera tion To edit the Email Configuration Events 1 Click on the Events link or the 5 button from the Cardholders web page e Seng To e Message b Devices D Carngholders Lateness Report Events Group 1 Description System Admin Group 1 Attached Message Message from Central Office E f All events C Selected events only C Omit these selected events only lt gt 2 Select the pre defined Message from the list _ 3 Select the desired radio button and click on the Fa
240. osch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 80 en Schedules ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 11 1 System Behaviour when using Schedule The diagram below provides a graphical representation of the system s behaviour when a Schedule is used on the various functions schedule configuration Behaviour when applied to Reader Door Behaviour when applied to Access Group Behaviour when applied to Card and PIN mode Behaviour when applied to Input Setup Behaviour when applied to Output Setup Interval 1 Start O830hrs Interval 1 End 1730hrs 0230 1731 2359 0830 1731 2359 Access Control Access Contral Processing Processing D e activated D e activated ss 1731 2358 PIM cade FIM cade required required 0830 1731 2358 Input Paint Input Paint Armed Armed 0530 1731 2359 Output Qutput Point Off Point Off Notice that all the functions toggle its state only at 1731hrs instead of 1730hrs The reason is that Access Easy Controller takes 17 30 59hrs as a valid End time for 1730hrs Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Schedules en 81 11 2 How to Configure Schedules 1 From the Left Pane menu select Schedules A screen as shown below appears Global Schadulas 1 128 129 255 gt Schedules Report z Undefined Schedule 2 4 Undefined Schedule 4 5 Undefined Schedule 5 6 fined l C
241. ost savings for the users gt Time and cost savings in the installation testing and commissioning of Access Easy Mas ter as no application programs are required to be installed on central computer s This Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Introduction to Access Easy Master en 13 implies greater profits at a shorter time for both distributors and installers The design of Access Easy Master adopts the common desktop metaphor for all Windows applications for consistency and ease of use The same look and feel such as buttons and check boxes that you have experienced in other Windows applications will be seen in Access Easy Master 2 2 Terms and Conventions If you are a Microsoft Windows user the terms in this User s Manual should be familiar to you If you have not used Windows before or would like a refresher course please read this sec tion to become familiar with some common terms gt Pointer refers to the arrow shaped cursor on the screen P Choose means to move the pointer to a menu command tool or button and press the left mouse button This term is synonymous with click gt Select means to mark an item with the selection cursor which can appear as a highlight a dotted rectangle or both P Double click means to press the left mouse button twice rapidly gt Drag means to hold down the left mouse button move the pointer to another location on the screen and
242. ould be used with nothing selected While for the Lateness Report the feature is disable if no selection is made on any of the day of week DOW A sample configuration for Lateness Report is presented at the end of the section To activate the Email SMS Configuration 1 From the Left Pane click on the Email SMS Configuration link The screen as shown below appears e SMS Server Settings ik i System Admin Group J Human Resources Security Officer System Admin Group 2 Undefined Group 6 Undefined Group 7 Undefined Group 8 Ko Ie Kr Kf Hi loeo pes D Mess amp Descri n d fr Office Message from Gateway Office Central Office Alarm Message Gateway Office Alarm Message Undefined Message 6 Undefined Message 7 a a e 2 Click on any of the Group or its Description and you will be shown the Send To page Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Panels Admin en 169 16 8 1 Send To This web page allows user to configure the email addresses of the recipients Up to two To and two Cc email addresses per group are available The Access Easy Controller will ignore any configurations made for the group if there is no email address in any of the To fields even though there is email address in the Cc field Each To and Cc should only contains one email address entering more than one email address separating by a coma or semi coma will be taken as
243. p page Access Easy Master will attempt to connect to the new controller and synchronize the database If Access Easy Master fails to connect to Access Easy controller status will show not connected 1 i7 le 10 92 Connected 2 Undefined Panel 2 Mot setup _ B test Not Connected C 3 Le o oam mm mo The Status column shows the status of the Access Easy Controllers with respect to the Access Easy Master Not Connected Access Easy Master is unable to detect the Access Easy Controller Initialising Access Easy Master is synchronizing with the Access Easy Control ler This will only happen when a new Controller is added and new database has to be created when a Controller is deleted There is no Access Easy Controller setup 4 After the Controller is successfully connected to the Server there will be 2 extra button AN and A in the Panel Settings as shown below for the user to synchronize the following data and settings configured in the Access Easy Master to the Controller Card Database Holidays Schedules and the groups under Controllers Admin such as Access Groups Card Readers Input Setup Output Setup Advance I O Setup Input Point Configura tion and Email SMS Configuration Manel Setu Panel Description 172 16 10 91 Panel IP Address 172 ie 10 ai m 9 1 1 How to download database to controller User can download database to the controller this allows user more control to select
244. p toggling gle It activates the Door Strike output for a period of the Door Strike Duration when a leading edge is detected Door Contact Level This input is edge triggered from O to 1 leading edge It activates the Door Forced Open output when a leading edge is detected and a period of the Door Forced Open Alarm Delay Duration has passed Lock Unlock Door Permanently locks unlocks the door when activated Door Strike Driven to high for a period of Door Strike Duration when a leading edge is detected at Request to Exit Door Forced Open Driven to high for the duration when Door Contact is high when a leading edge is detected at Door Contact and the Door Forced Open Alarm Delay Duration has lapsed Door Held Open Driven to high when the Door Strike Duration is over and subse quently the Door Open Duration is over The timing diagram below gives a graphical description of the function Request ta Exit Toaggle Door Contact Lewel Lock Unlock Door Door Strike Door Forced Open Sectian 4 Door Held Open o Section 3 t1 Door Strike Duration t3 Door Forced Open Alarm Delay Duration Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Panels Admin en 165 16 6 10 In the timing diagram it is divided into 4 sections The basic operation of each section is out lined below Section 1 In Section 1 a leading edge from O
245. pears as shown in the following diagram f Selected Devices Only C Omit these Selected Devices Only Server Room Entrance List of Selected Devices Select a Device Main Entrance 3 Select a device from the pull down list and click on the button The selected device appears in the List of Selected Devices window Repeat step 3 if you have other Devices to put on the list 4 To delete selected device s click on the device name in the window followed by the button Repeat step 4 if necessary _ 5 When you finish with your selection click on the button 16 8 4 Cardholders This web page allows user to configure the second Cardholders of the three items for the AND operation To edit the Email Configuration Cardholders 1 Click on the Cardholders link or the button from the Devices web page a Send To e uiu e vices e Events L EI Report Cardholders Group Description System Admin Group 1 All cardholders C Selected cardholders only Omit these selected cardholders only GE 2 Select the desired radio button and click on the button If selection is made on either Selected Cardholders Only or Omit these Selected Cardholders Only a window and the Search field appear as shown below You have the option to search by Name Card Number or the 2 User Field by selecting from the Option drop down box John Lim 1063 List of Selected Cardhalders Search Option Hane Robert B
246. points that are triggered by Input Points Please refer to the Chapter on Output Control for detail Before we start here is a brief description of how the Access Easy Controller interprets the Schedule Intervals for Output Points triggering status For example If the setting for Schedule 2 is Interval 1 Start 0830hrs End 1730hrs Interval 2 3 and 4 has no setting When the Schedule 2 is tied to Output Point 1 the point will turn on and off accordingly O000hrs oes0hrs 1r731hrz z358hrz Output Point 1 status Take note that the Output Point switches On at exactly O830hrs but switches Off at 1731hrs a minute delay as compared to the Schedule 2 setting The reason is that Access Easy Con troller takes 17 30 59hrs as a valid End time for 1730hrs To Setup the Output Point select the target Access Easy Controller Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Panels Admin en 151 Panel Admin Panel 3 Output Point Setup i j Motion Detector imula Motion Detector 3 Simulator Motion Detector 4 Simulator Motior r imulator Light Control 1 Light Control z n n t Poin ndetin Pour 1 ndefi Qutput Point 11 Undefined Qutput Point 12 Undefined Output Point 13 ndehined Qut int 14 T Undefined Output Point 16 ndefine tput Point 17 Undefined Output Point 18 Undetined Output int 21 Undefined Output Point 22 Undefined Qutput Point 23 Undefined Output
247. priority over the control set by the sys tem However the system will take over and resume normal operation once it encounters a valid Schedule Interval We show an example to illustrate the condition The setting for Interval 1 is Start O830hrs and End 1730hrs Interval 2 3 and 4 has no setting Ds hrs 1r31hrs SASS D ddr Door status cue DE Neee schedule mi tones RS Si Lockea A a HC NR UR Rcs Manual Door C t 1 Unlock Door at 7 3u hrs 3 Lock Door at 1zZ3 0hrs oniro 2 Lock Door at 0800hrs 4 Unlock Door at 4345hrs command sent DDDDhrs DSSDhrs 1r21hrs 2359hrs Door Statu NNI S SS rs hrs O800hrs 1z3 0hrs 1315hrs Legend box Iz ppmarenly uniccied S box ls pem anenly locked Notice that the system resume normal operation as according to Schedule at O830hrs and 1731hrs Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 19 1 To activate Door Control Door Control en 201 There are various ways to activate the Door Control menu item They are 1 From the Home page click on Manual Control or its icon button 2 From the View Activity page click on Door Control hyperlink 3 From any of the menu items page of the Manual Control Group output control anual Control Door Control Production Dept Entry Reader Production Dept Exit Reader Reader 3 Reader 4 Reader 5 Reader 6 Read
248. ptions ev Settings Anti Passback e ous Card APB Settings Configuration Ce PIN code not required C PIN code required at all times PIN code required except during schedule intervals FIN code required except during regular schedule intervals and holiday schedule intervals Schedule Ho Schedule H C PIN code only operation using Reader s PIN code Readers PIN code 1 7 digits Sern e This section allows user to set the parameter on when the Personal Identification Number PIN is to be used A screen of the PIN Code Settings page is shown above Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Panels Admin en 139 PIN code not required When this mode is selected users accessing this Reader do not have to key in the PIN code PIN code required at all times When this mode is selected users are required to key in the PIN code NOTICE In order for the feature to work the Cardholder s Card PIN is required on keypad readers mode must be activated and the PIN must be set at the card in Card Assignment page For the setting of the PIN please refer to Chapter 6 Card Assignment Card Functionality Card PIN is required on Keypad readers PIN code required except during schedule intervals When this mode is selected users are not required to key in his her PIN code during specific periods defined in the Schedule settings As an example the Start and End time for Interval 1 of th
249. r 1 0 1 2012 10 28 en Manual Control ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 5 Manual Control The Manual Control menu in Access Easy Master comprises of Door Control Input Control and Output Control Each control provides a means to easily modify and control any card reader input or output point in the system This chapter shall discuss each of the control in detail 5 1 Door Control Door Control allows the user to check the status of all the doors and send a command to either Momentarily Unlock or permanently Unlock Lock the door from remote As this is a control operated by a user manually it has priority over the control set by the sys tem However the system will take over and resume normal operation once it encounters a valid Schedule Interval Here is an example to illustrate the condition The setting for Interval 1 is Start O830hrs and End 1730hrs Interval 2 3 and 4 has no setting OS 30 hrs 1r31hrs Door Status VI according to NES Door schedule V me OPENS Mu Locked S Mx ss Sy Manual Door Control 1 Unlock Door at OF 3 0hrz 3 Lock Door at 1230hrs antro 2 Lock Door at O amp 00hrs 4 Unlock Door at 1315hrs command sent OOOO hrs ss hrs 1r31hrs 2559 hrs Baer WW i zs hrs s hrs 123 hrs 1315hrs Legend boy is nermzrerily rioed m Door Iz nem anenliy loosed pemarenty Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master
250. r 9 Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Card Assignment en 63 Card Assignment Report Generation Card 9 Name List of Person Found anna Earanina Selected list of Card Holders anna Karanina When we search for a card number 9 for example you will see a screen as above We will be able to see the Name of the person corresponding to the Card Number Clicking once on the person s name will add that person to the Selected list of Card Holders We may also perform a search by Name Let us consider for example that we are searching for a Name John When we perform a search for John we will be able to see all persons hav ing John in their name Card Assignment Report Generation Card Name John List of Person Found John Clinton John d Baptist John Eales John Travolta John Michael Vincent 7 Selected list of Card Holders Anna Karanina Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 64 en Card Assignment ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 We may select the person you want to add to the Selected list of Card Holders by clicking once on the person s name in the List of Person Found window 3 To generate a cardholders report based on the parameters above click on the submit Mh icon A sample report is shown below Bosch Security Systems Pte Ltd J C Jalan
251. r Controller Code Format e ee qe qe B m 85 Jer Hee quie uu uer m a Ec pppeppEe Legend E Resultant Even Parity Bit F Facility Code Bit C Card Number Bit O Resultant Odd Parity Bit Parity Format ee fe fee fe jeje je fe fer Legend E Even Parity Bit Location P Resultant Even and Odd Parity Bit O Odd Parity Bit Location In order for the Access Easy Controller to decode the data string correctly we need to config ure the code accordingly Referring to the Code Format Table 1 Enter P or p for the resultant Even E and Odd O Parity Bit 2 EnterF orf for the Facility Code Bit F 3 Enter Cor c for the Card Number Bit C Referring to the Code Format Table 1 Enter P or p for the resultant Even E and Odd O Parity Bit 2 EnterF orf for the Facility Code Bit F 3 Enter Cor c for the Card Number Bit C Referring to the Parity Format Table For the Odd Parity Format 1 Enter O or o for the resultant Odd Parity Bit O 2 Enter X or x for Odd Parity Bit Location 3 Enter B or b otherwise Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Server Setup en 89 For the Even Parity Format 1 Enter E or e for the resultant Even Parity Bit E 2 Enter X or x for Even Parity Bit Location 3 Enter B or b otherwise With the information proceed to configure the Card Format as shown below Format x Description Standard 2b bit Format Card E
252. r Master Details of the various menu items that are available for Access Easy for Master will be covered in the next following chap ters However a brief description of each item will be presented here NOTICE Most of the features are incorporated into Access Easy Master This allows Access Easy Mas ter to centrally control and administer all changes of the Access Easy Controller Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Accessing and Understanding Access Easy for Master Main Menu en 197 18 3 1 18 3 2 18 3 3 18 3 4 Manual Control This menu group relates more to manual user intervention control of system hardware and consists of the following menu items Door Control Input Control Output Control and Reset APB Panel Admin Users are to set up the User ID and Password including access rights to the various menu items Panel Setup is for setting up of various miscellaneous parameters Network Settings Auto Logout Timer Audit Log Set Date amp Time vvvv Panel Maintenance Update Flash is a utility that is used when there is a program upgrade It s usually carried out for firmware enhancement new features or bug fixing It can also be used for database recovery Reboot Panel is used to reboot the Access Easy for Master It s usually carried out before changes can take effect Some examples are Access Easy for Master IP Address or during a firmware upgrade Lo
253. r Name e Alarm Description Door Forced Open Instruction Production Door has been Force Open Check the status and call the Production manage if there is an incEuSion Available unacknowledge alarms Acknowledge all alarms Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Server Setup en 99 12 9 1 The system too provides a feature ndividual Alarm Priority This allows you to configure a very important location with a higher priority than other location when the same alarm is activated For example the Store Room is considered to be an important location to monitor It is config ured with an individual priority of 2 while the Door Forced Open alarm is configured with global priority 3 Hence if the following Door Forced Open alarm is activated the Store Room s Door Forced Open alarm will be listed on top of the rest even though it has occurred last Store Room Door Forced Openi1 00am R amp D Room Door Forced Openi0 00am Production Room Door Forced Open10 30am This Chapter will guide you step by step in configuring the Alarm Events to respond the way you prefer Alarm Priority Setup Alarm Priority Setup can be grouped into Global Alarm Priority Setup and Individual Alarm Priority Setup This section will describe how to configure Global and Individ ual Alarm Priority Setup How to Configure Global Alarm Priority Setup This part of the setting allows you to define the h
254. r the section How to Add a Batch of Cards user will also learn How to Add a Batch of Cards with Reference to an Existing Card How to Use Automatically replace the existing card s with default reference card information and what happens during an Unsuccessful Card Add Operation How to Add a New Card Gard Cssignment Batch Cards fh Search By Card Add Card ih Search By Name Add Card ff ment screen will appear as shown below In the Card Assignment screen click on to add a new card The Card Assign Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 48 en Card Assignment ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 6 2 2 Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Card Assignment Search By Card Batch Cards ff Search By Name Add Card ih Card 1 Facility Code j Card Format AEC Priority Format hl User Name Card Number 1 User Field 1 User Field 2 we Access Level Please select an Access Level Card Details Card holder is able to Arm Disarm Edit Card holder must abide by holiday schedules To work in conjunction with Reader Options m Enter the fields in the appropriate boxes and click FA to save the settings The functionality of each field is described in the section The Card Parameters above NOTICE During a Add Card Operation when adding card numbers beginning with a digit 0 for example 09 the O will be truncated and the card number becomes 9 How to Add a Batch of Cards
255. r will only grant him access In addition user will also be granted access at the moment he disarms the Alarm Zone at the reader if he has access rights to the arm disarm reader The reader must be configured as an Entry and Arm Disarm reader for the specified zone before the cardholder can arm disarm the Alarm Zone at the reader Cardholder must abide by holiday schedules to work in conjunction with Reader Options This mode must be checked if the cardholders access rights are different during holidays either Regular Holidays or Special Holidays This mode works in conjunction with the Reader Options On Holidays follow holiday schedules to work in conjunction with card functional ity If the Reader Option is not checked cardholders access rights to the readers will follow the schedule for normal days of the week Reader Options can be configured under Panels Admin Card Readers of the selected Access Easy Controller menu Allow exit reader usage only in accordance with time schedules This mode is useful in case an exit reader is present If you select this mode the Reader will allow the cardholders to exit within their schedule intervals If this mode is not selected the cardholders can exit at all times regardless of Holidays or schedules Card PIN is required on Keypad readers When this mode is selected user will have to assign a user PIN to the card at the location Enter user PIN 1 7 digits If this mode is selected cardhold
256. re Activity We Transactions 7000000000000 Door Closed Tamper Restored Alarm Restored 4 Power Restored Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 248 en APPENDIX C Activity Transactions ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 30 3 Valid Activity EEULL MM r pae ip forto O LL I 3 D Q 11 Door Unlocked 12 Door Locked By Schedule i z z z 30 4 Time Attendance No Transactions 14 15 16 17 18 19 0 Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller APPENDIX D Email SMS Configuration Table en 249 31 APPENDIX D Email SMS Configuration Table This Appendix provides information on how to select the appropriate item options with refer ence to the Events list For each Event an X indicates the possible selection that can be made under the Devices and Cardholders column For example in order for Access Easy Controller to send an Email or SMS when an Alarm or Alarm Restored occurs on Input 1 The following must be set Devices Selected Device Only option and choose only Input 1 Events Selected events only option and choose Alarm and Alarm Restored Cardholders All Cardholders For this scenario never choose Selected Cardholders only for Cardholders settings or Selected Readers or All Readers for Devices setting these settings will result in not receiv ing an
257. release the mouse button gt Field is a category of information It could be card numbers names shift codes or dates 2 3 In addition to these terms the following conventions are used gt Menu command table names are shown in italic type gt Word in Bold represents the key on the keyboard For example Alt indicates the Alt key in the keyboard P When two keys are used together to perform a task they are separated with a plus sign For example the key combination Ctrl FA means you hold down the Ctrl key and press the FA key Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 14 en Logging In And Understanding Access Easy Master Main Menu ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 3 Logging In And Understanding Access Easy Master Main Menu Before the user starts to understand Access Easy Master main menu let us take a look at the procedures in logging in first 3 1 Logging Into Access Easy Master In order to login to Access Easy Master a computer with a standard web browser program such as Internet Explorer version 6 0 and above or Netscape version 7 0 and above is required on the computer 1 To get connected to Access Easy Master run your web browser page with the default URL address for the Access Easy Master Enter URL address for Access Easy Master c Mision Microsoft Internet Explorer Stop Retresh Home Go Links Snagt ty 2 Ifthe page cannot be
258. remoteahoztl z 129 2 42 remotehozt x 129 2 iU 1433 remoehncozt s 2 E382 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Panel Setup en 219 23 5 1 To edit the Dial In IP Settings Information 1 Highlight the default text in the Dial In IP Assignment fields and enter the appropriate IP address Panel Admin Dial In IP Assignment 10 ofl Jala e eee 2 Click on the button 23 5 2 Access Easy Master IP Address Settings for Access Easy for Master This section allows user to define the IP address for connection between Access Easy Master and Access Easy for Master 1 From the Panel Setup screen click on the AEMC Settings link Panel Admin e Network Settings Email Server Settings e Dial In IP Settings sms Server Settings IP Address 1721 116 10 81 Connection Status Connected 2 Enter the IP address of the Access Easy Master 3 Click on the gt button or click button to save the settings Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 220 en Panel Setup 23 5 3 Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller SMS Server Settings Information This section allows user to define the IP address of the Access Easy for Master that has a GSM adapter attached to its serial com acting as the SMS server To briefly understand how the SMS feature works we need to understand how the system should be configur
259. rint preview of the report The following screen capture Return to View Activity Return To Reset AFE Return To Selection Criteria Bosch Security systems Pte Lt d 39C Jalan Feninpin Singaporea 577L2 0 APH Report ednesday 32 Aug 2005 24 002 49 APS Zone ALL dones Ho Card H Name Zone 1 2397423 Bill Lae TH Zone Z 2 23741 Micheal Gordon Zane l Return to View Activity Return To Reset APB Return To Selection Criteria Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 214 en Reset APB ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller If you wish to print out a hardcopy click on the Print button located on the Toolbar of the web browser program Alternatively click on the File and select Print 4 To return to the Reset APB web page click on the Esturn To Reset APB inc 5 To return to the view activity page click on the Return to View Activity inc 6 To generate a preview of other zone click on the Return To Selection Criteria ink Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Panel Setup en 215 23 Panel Setup This chapter covers a step by step guide to set up the Panel Setup In the Panel Setup user is allowed to set the following configuration gt Network Settings gt Auto Logout Timer gt Audit Log gt Set Date amp Time Setting 23 1 To activate Panel Setup The Panel Setup can be activated only from the menu item page 1 From any men
260. rlink The following screen will appear Panel Admin Pa nel 3 Input Point Configuration Readers 1 8 Readers 9 16 da Inputs 1 16 Inputs 17 32 inverted Input Points Clear All C Select All Manual na PE SEAT SEES SUnEVIZES eet 1 Main Entrance Request to Exit e C 6 2 Main Entrance Door Contact e E 3 3 X Side Entrance Request tn Exit v C C 4 Side Entrance Door Contact i c C 5 R amp D Dept Entry Reader Request to Exit v C 6 R amp D Dept Entry Reader Door Contact e C C r ee Dept Entry Reader Request to e C C 5 Canet Dept ii Reader Door c C g r3 Pm Dept Exit Reader Request to e C C 10 Production Dept Exit Reader Door Contact C C 11 Project Dept Entry Reader Request to Exit C C 12 Project Dept Entry Reader Door Contact C C 13 Sales Dept Entry Reader Request to Exit e C C 14 Sales Dept Entry Reader Door Contact v C C NOTICE Input 9 and 10 are assigned to Reader 5 Production Dept Exit Reader Since Reader 5 is defined as an Exit Reader the check boxes are disabled Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Panels Admin en 167 To select Input Point Configuration Using Manual This is the default selection 1 To assign the required Input Point Configuration for the inversion click on the correspond ing Input Point Configuration check boxes to show a
261. rm Sensor 2 Simulation of Alarm Sensor 3 Warehouse Lighting COTY Activation Undefined Output Point amp Undefined Output Point 7 Undefined Output Point Undefined Output Point 9 Undefined Output Point 10 Undefined Output Point 11 Undefined Output Point 12 Undefined Output Point 13 Undefined Output Point 14 Undefined Output Point 15 Undefined Output Point 16 OF off OF On Off Or etr Orr tT Ott Or Ott tT Ott Ott Ott 33393 3733333339393 Ma Change Ho Change No Change Ho Change No Change No Change Ho Change Ho Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change a aime a ime ms ke Ge fk Ge te ee de es ee ee GENE IC Ie lela ala Ca CO Ce The following paragraphs provide some description of what you Duration On Duration On Duratian Cn Duration Off Duration On Duration On Duration On Duration On Duration On Duration On Duration On Duration On Duration On Duration On Duration On Duration Gn will see on the web page Current Status provide user with the current status of the Output Points On status indicates that the Output Point is on and Off status indicates that the Output Point is off Manual Actions provide user with radio buttons selection of what manual action to perform The description of the second radio button is the opposite of the current status and it will tog gle between On and Off The third radio
262. rnative country that uses the same Time Zone Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Panel Setup en 225 23 7 Auto Logout Timer This configuration allows user to set the timer for the Access Easy for Master to Logout auto matically if it detects no user activity Default setting is 1 hour NOTICE This Timer setting is applicable to all menu items except View Activity 23 7 1 To activate Auto Logout Timer 1 From the Panel Setup screen click on the Auto Logout Timer link Panel Admin Panel Setup e Network Settings Input Point Configuratian e Set Date amp Time jee Auto Logout Timer Eel Audit Log oe Default Settings ei Card Format e Company Profile oh Email SMS Configuration Hour Minute To edit the Auto Logout Timer 1 Select the hour and minutes from the list g 2 Click on the 999 button 23 8 Audit Log The Access Easy for Master keeps 2 types of log gt User Log gt System Log User log tracks the Users operation on the Access Easy for Master it logs all the action per formed by the user such as manual on off any output change the settings for a Cardholder set the date and time etc It is a form of audit trail that could be used to keep track of what are the changes done of the system System log keep track of some of the important information of the system such as mac address last boot time current boot time version of the so
263. rnet Explorer Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Accessing and Understanding Access Easy for Master Main Menu en 195 18 2 1 18 2 2 The User Login dialog box appears This User Login dialog box provides a security control that protects the Access Easy for Master from unauthorised access It requires a user to enter his or her User ID followed by a Password before he or she is allowed access to Access Easy for Master Up to two users are able to log onto the same Access Easy for Master concurrently using different computers NOTICE The Password is case sensitive and can be changed The Access Easy for Master has only one assigned User ID and Password This default User ID has only restricted access rights to all features of the Access Easy for Master The User ID and Password can be changed The default User ID useri1 and Password 8088 NOTICE Once the system is commissioned and handed over change the default User ID and Password as soon as possible to prevent unauthorised access Logging onto Access Easy for Master 1 Enter your assigned User ID in the User ID edit box 2 Enter your assigned Password 3 Click on the Login button If you do not know your User ID and Password contact your System Administrator to obtain them User IDs and Passwords are only configured by the Access Easy for Master System Administrator Logging off from Access Easy for Master After yo
264. rol Input Control Output Control Database Admin Card Assignment Access Levels System Admin Users Setup Panel Setup Server Setup Report Generation Database Backup Reboot Panels Admin Access Groups Card Readers Input Setup Output Setup Advance I O Setup Input Point Configuration Email sMS Configuration Reset APB NOTICE The first Login User will always be the Super User A Super User has access to all menu items DII IB I T am d PLEO ECE CELI Ack r r r r r r r r r r r r r Ack all r and its settings cannot be changed except for the User Name and the Password Check box that are grey out like this indicates that the setting cannot be changed To edit the User Name delete the default User Name and enter the new User Name limit ing to eight alohanumerical characters including punctuation marks To edit the Password delete the default Password and enter the new Password limiting to eight alohanumerical characters see Notice below NOTICE The Password is case sensitive For security reason every character entered for the Password is represented by an asterisk For Macintosh user it is represented by a dot instead ie 4 Click on the icon to save the settings The new settings will only take effect upon the next successful login Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 70 en Users Setup 8 1 2 Ver 1 0 1 2012 10
265. rosoft DLC MetBELII i Have Disk Cancel WAN support Far ATM 7 Click on the OK button to proceed with the component installation Follow through the on screen instruction to complete NOTICE You might be required to have your Windows Installation Disk in your CD ROM drive Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller APPENDIX F Initial Setup To Access Easy Controller en 267 8 Continuing from step 3 click on the Properties button The TCP IP Properties dialog box appears TCP IP Properties Ei Bindings Advanced Nemos DNS Configuration Gateway WINS Configuration F Address An F address can be automatically assigned to this computer IF your network does not automatically assign IP addresses ask your network administrator for an address and then type it in the space below C Specify an IP address OF Cancel 9 Click on the Specify an IP address radio button This will enable the field for P Address and Subnet Mask 10 Enter the P Address and Subnet Mask as shown This will be the PC s IP Address for this initial set up TCP IP Properties Bindings Advanced Nemos DNS Configuration Gateway WINS Configuration F Address An IP address can be automatically assigned to this computer IF your network does not automatically assign IP addresses ask your network administrator for
266. rs To activate Users To edit User ID and Password Dial in User Setting up Windows for Dial in Setting up Macintosh for Dial in Software Manual Table of Contents en 9 203 204 206 207 208 209 210 211 211 211 212 213 213 213 215 215 216 216 217 217 217 218 218 219 219 220 224 224 224 225 225 225 226 227 229 229 229 230 230 236 Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 10 en Table of Contents 26 26 1 26 1 1 27 27 1 28 29 30 30 1 30 2 30 3 30 4 31 32 32 1 32 2 33 33 1 Sod 33 2 33 3 39 3 1 33 4 33 5 34 34 1 34 2 Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Update Flash To activate Update Flash To Update Panel Software Reboot Panel To activate Reboot Panel APPENDIX A Selecting Events Devices and Cardholders for Report Generation APPENDIX B Configuring Alarm Events APPENDIX C Activity Transactions Alarm Activity Restore Activity Valid Activity Time Attendance APPENDIX D Email SMS Configuration Table APPENDIX E Setting up a Timeserver Windows 2000 and XP Professional For Windows 2000 For Windows XP Professional APPENDIX F Initial Setup To Access Easy Controller Procedure to set the IP Address of computer For PC Users For Macintosh Users Setting to be made to the Web browser For PC User For Macintosh Users Setting the Access Easy Controller IP Address Through Address Resolution Protocol ARP APPENDIX G Preparing the WAVECOM GSM Modem for Access Easy
267. rs Card Readers are used to define the function of the Readers and their parameters such as door settings etc Input Setup Input Setup is used to set up Alarm Monitoring Point to be armed disarmed based on Sched ule or via an assigned Reader It also allows the definition of which output points to trigger should an alarm be detected Output Setup Output Setup is used to set up the triggering of output relay based on Schedules For exam ple this can be used to turn on lighting in an area after office hours Advance I O Setup Advance I O Setup enables the rerouting of physical or logical information from one operation to another Due to its flexibility the type of operation it can achieve is dependent on the installer Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 20 en Logging In And Understanding Access Easy Master Main Menu ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 3 3 Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Input Point Configuration Input Point Configuration allows the user to invert the logical state of the input that is seen by the Access Easy Controller as well as to select the monitoring state of the Input Point Email SMS Configuration Email SMS Configuration allows the user to setup the Email and SMS Server Settings to allow the Access Easy Controller to send out messages or email to selected mobile numbers or email addresses according to the selected Devices Cardholders and Events Lateness Report can also to sent to
268. s Start Date Day OF iv Month Jul Year 2005 End Date Day Month Year Dual Card Assignment Dual Card not assigned O Dual Card presentation sequence First Card Dual Card Group ID 1 255 Cardholder is able to Arm Disarm If this feature is checked it implies that the cardholder is given the authority to arm disarm a specific Alarm Zone or all Alarm Zones using his card on the Zone s Arm Disarm reader To select an Alarm Zone click on the Edit hyperlink beside fd holder is able to Arm Disarm Edit The arm disarm details will appear as shown below Central Office Mone Alarm Zane 1 C Alarm Zone 2 Alarm Zone 3 Alarm Zane 4 C All Zones North Zone Branch Mane C Alarm Zone 1 Alarm Zone 2 C Alarm Zone 3 Alarm Zone 4 C All Zones Select the Alarm Zone the cardholder can Arm Disarm for each Access Easy Controller Cen tral Office and North Zone Branch in this case by selecting the appropriate radio buttons and Ed click Gl If the cardholder can Arm Disarm all the alarm zones select the All Zones radio button If not required select the None radio button To close the window click Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Card Assignment en 45 NOTICE If cardholder has access rights to the arm disarm reader he has to press O0 on the reader keypad before he presents his arm disarm card else reade
269. s with default reference card information Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Card Assignment en 51 6 2 3 6 3 6 3 1 Unsuccessful Card Add Operation There are a few occasion when the Card Add Operation is not successful When this occurs the following messages will be displayed on the screen Card No already exist An existing card with the same Card Number Facility Code and Card Format is found in the system and Automatically replace existing card s with default reference card informa tion option is not selected The system will not overwrite the existing card and the new card will not be added Reference card number not Reference card is not found in the database It could be found due to incorrect information in Card Format Facility Code or Card Number How to Delete a Batch of Cards 1 You can delete a range of card numbers in a way similar to adding cards Click on the icon instead to delete card numbers 2 A window as shown below appears Select OK to delete cards Microsoft Internet Explorer Ei 7 Do you really want to delete this Card OF Cancel 3 After the cards are successfully deleted a Batch operation completed message appears NOTICE Deleting a range of cards is irreversible so you have to be careful while deleting How to Import and Export Card Database Card Database can be exported in CSV format to be stored i
270. s controller is attached to a GSM adapter you will need to configure the IP address of other Access Easy for Master that will send SMS message through it To change this setting click on the SMS Server IP Settings to access to the setting page as shown in the following diagram Panel Admin anels IP Address 172 16 10 88 anel s IP Hetmask 755 755 55 0 anels Gateway 172 16 10 1 Remote PE Address 172 16 10 10 reaatehost i z 123 2 a 43 remotehozt2 3 1253 2 a a3 remcotehcozt3i mx 1 The SMS Server Setting page is shown below Panel Admin LP Enc x a ne Blo Card Format P Compans Profile Network Settings a Email Server Settings qi Dial in IP Settings QP AEMC Settings SMS Server IP GSM Modem Connected 2 Yes CQ No gt lt 2 Since this is an SMS Server we will select Yes for GSM Modem Connected and click button 3 You will need to reboot the Access Easy for Master for the changes to take place the save Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 222 en Panel Setup ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 4 After rebooting goes back to the SMS Server page and you will see the following GSM Modem Connected 2 Yes Q No Remate Panel Address Fi IF Address AEC Panel Ham U j U D och c Qe A de C d ka eie ae a gamme Hi c n Li a Lj LI a Li Lj C O cic vt v cl 9v Lal LJ m Lj T n
271. s the administrator to assign cards to users The Access Level for the user and the Card Functionality is configured in this section also Access Levels Access Levels allows the user to define Access Groups belonging to different Access Easy Controller into groups These groups when assigned to a cardholder allow him to access to doors over multiple Access Easy Controller hence enabling the administrator to manage cardholders access in a centralized location System Admin System Admin menu allows the user to setup the different aspects of the system such as the users controller and server side It also allows the user to generate reports from the system and backup database of the system The sub menu items of System Admin are Users Setup Panel Setup Holidays Schedules Server Setup Report Generation Database Backup Reboot Shutdown and Logout Users Setup Users Setup allows the user to set up the User ID and Password including access rights to the various menu items Panel Setup Panel Setup allows the user to admit Access Easy Controller to join the system network Holidays Holidays allows the user to setup centralized Holiday dates that are applicable to all the Access Easy Controller Schedules Schedules allow the user to setup centralized Schedules available to all the Access Easy Con troller that can be assigned to schedules of Readers or to Access Groups Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy
272. sent to field of the dispatched email Outgoing Mail SMTP Server fi 29 2 0 86 Outgoing Mail SMTP Server Port 25 WebCASt s Email amp ddress Name AEC bosch com sg x gt Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Panels Admin en 177 To edit the Email Server Setup Information 1 Highlight the default text in the Outgoing Mail SMTP Server field and enter the appro priate text 2 The default number 25 is the commonly used port number for the Outgoing Mail SMTP Server unless your configuration is different we suggest you skip this field 3 Enter the Access Easy Controller Address Name as a complete word with no spacing in between You can use the underscore _ to denote spacing The Address Name speci fied in this field will be used together with the Domain name to form the email address of the Access Easy Controller Referring to the diagram and with the Domain name bosch com sg the email address of Access Easy Controller becomes AEC bosch com sg 16 8 8 SMS Server Settings This section allows user to define the IP address of the Access Easy Controller that has a GSM adapter attached to its serial com acting as the SMS server To briefly understood how the SMS feature works we need to understand how the system should be configured 4 Click on the button The following diagram shows a drawing that has more than one Access Easy Controllers in the network
273. ser manually synchronise with the timer server audit log will be logged 2 Select Disable synchronization if time difference between AEC and Time Server is gt 15 min utes if you wants the Access Easy Controller to synchronize it s time even if the difference is more than 15minutes This feature should be enabled to prevent the Access Easy Con troller from synchrnoizing the wrong time with the Time server that is not accurate or tim ezone is incorrect Synchronizing date amp time with a internet Time Server Access Easy Controller is not able to synchronize with an internet Time Server if it is behind a firewall or proxy server If it is outside the firewall or in a DMZ you could enter the IP address of the Time Server in the Time Server Address DNS input Do not enter the domain name of the Time Server eg Time windows gov in this input Access Easy Controller will not be able to resolve the name to an IP address Synchronizing date amp time with an intranet Time Server It is recommended that the Access Easy Controller should synchronize it s date amp time to an intranet internal Time Server Most of the office has an internal Time Server this Time Server will synchronize it s date amp time with an internet external Time Server while all other PCs in the office synchronize with this intranet Time Server If the office does not have a intranet Time Server you could setup any existing PC on the net work as a Time Server henc
274. ser to go to the user details page Let us consider another example Suppose we want to search for a Card Number 232 The resultant screen will show Card information of the search as shown on the following page Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 62 en Card Assignment ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Card Assignment EL o3 Batch Cards s Search By Card 3 Add Card 15 Export m List amp Card Report Search By Mame an te Z3 Peter Lim Searching for a card with card number 232 will display all cards with card number 232 If the system has two or more cards with exactly the same card number but their Card Format or Facility Code is different a list of User names will be listed for your selection 6 5 How to Generate Card Assignment Report The Card Assignment Report Generation feature allows us to view a report on all or selected cardholders based on their Name or their Card Number When we select on the Card Report hyperlink Sard Report on the first page of Card Assign ment we will see a screen as shown below Card Absignment Report Generation Card Name Selected list of Card Holders I TM E wo E Y Es o a T We may either search for a cardholder by Card Number or by Name and add to the selected list of cardholders When we perform a search by Card Number you will see a screen as shown below Let us assume that we are searching for a card numbe
275. setting If you do not change the IP address of the PC you will not able to access the Access Easy Master at all Hence it is impor tant to have your PC pre configured with the correct IP address before you proceed any fur ther We will guide you in the following steps to configure a typical PC s IP address to 129 2 0 40 The following series of screen captures is taken with reference from Win 98 Reader should refer to their network administrator if their OS is not Win 98 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller How to Configure the Access Easy Master IP Address en 183 1 Click on the gas button followed by Settings Control Panel 2 Double click on the Network icon the Network dialog box appears Hetwork DialUp Adapter 9 Microsoft PPP over ATM Adapter Microsoft Virtual Private Networking Adapter Use this scroll bar to view the installed network 3 components al nep fre WE 3 Use the Scroll Bar to look up for TCP IP from the list as shown in the following diagram However if this component is not found proceed from step 4 to step 7 to install it else skip to step 8 Look for component similar to this If the installed Wetwork Ad apter has a specified description such as 32 bits PCI Fast Ethernet Adapter NO S53 look for it instead That is TCP IP 32 Pats PCI Fast Ethemet Adapter MDIS3 gt BR F J n Ls j 1 il D T rr a T
276. spective Input Point is Disarmed and its current status is close Disarmed High The respective Input Point is Disarmed and its current status is open An Alarm is detected from the Input Point Bypassed Low The Input Point has been bypassed though the alarm zone is armed This situation can only happen when the input point status is close while the alarm zone is armed Bypassed High The Input Point has been bypassed though the alarm zone is armed This situation can only happen when the input point status is open uud while the alarm zone is armed Manual Actions column provides the check box for selection of the input points to issue the command There are 2 types of action command available This icon means that by selecting the check box an Arming com mand will be issued when submitted This icon means that by selecting the check box a Disarming com mand will be issued when submitted Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 206 en Input Control 20 1 1 To control Arm Disarm an Input Point ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller These are Input points that are not included in any of the 4 Alarm Zones nor are it controlled by Schedule They are independent points that could be armed or disarmed manually Manual Control Input Control oce GP ouput contral GQ kammare Gh view Activity Gi o 532i alam zona Alam Zones Input Point 1 Input Point Z Undef
277. ss Report For email onl Group 1 Description System Admin Group 1 Attendance Cut Off Time Hour 0 Minute 0 Day of week ta send report Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri sat All cardholders C Selected cardholders only C Omit these selected cardholders only aot ur RR HT qe 2 Select the Attendance Cut off Time Hour and Minutes from the list The Attendance Cut off Time defines the time on which the Panel checks through the current date s transactions for the presence of Card numbers and making comparison with respect to the Card database and the Selected Omission list 3 Select the appropriate Day of the week to send report check boxes The Day of the week to send report defines the day on which the Panel will keep track of the cut off time and to send out the report to the respectively email addresses Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 174 en Panels Admin ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller LI 4 Select the desired radio button and click on the button If selection is made on either Selected Cardholders Only or Omit these Selected Cardholders Only a window and the Search field appear as shown below You have the option to search by Name or Card Number or User Field by selecting from the Option drop down box John Lim 108 List of Selected Cardhalders Search eZ Option Hane zl The function of Selection By Card and Selection By Name is similar to the
278. ssword has to be changed for security reasons Enter the changed user name and password You may also set the number of illegal password attempts and the illegal attempts lockout duration as shown in the screen 4 The Number of illegal password attempts drop down box allows you to set the number of times the system will let you enter an illegal password before locking you out 5 The Illegal attempts lockout duration box allows you to set the duration to disable the dial in feature after a number of illegal password attempts as specified in step 4 6 Click Save button to save configuration 7 Make sure that a 56K modem is connected to your Access Easy Controller and is powered up The modem must be connected to your telephone line to receive a dial in request Access Easy for Master will initialise the modem when it is re booted 8 Re boot the Access Easy for Master 9 Now your Access Easy for Master is ready to receive a dial in request NOTICE 1 The modem has to be power up and connected to the Access Easy Controller before the Access Easy Controller reboots Access Easy Controller will initialise the modem to auto answer mode If initialising is not done dial in will not be successful 2 Onceinitialised the modem will always go into auto answer mode when power up Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 232 en Dial in User ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller The following setup will guide you throug
279. stalled If the installed Network Adapter has a specified description such as 32 Bits PCI Fast Ethemet Adapter HDISS3 look far it instead That is TCP IP gt 32 Bits PCI Fast Ethernet Adapter NDIS3 NDISWAN gt Microsoft Virtual Private Metwarkarig Adapte TCP IP gt Dial Up Adapter amp TCP IP NE2000 Compatible File and printer sharing For Microsoft Networks Service Far Netware Directory Services Hemaore Properties Primary Network Logon Client For Microsoft Networks File and Print Sharing Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 266 en APPENDIX F Initial Setup To Access Easy Controller ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 4 To add the TCP IP component click on the Add button The Select Network Component Type dialog box appears Select Network Component Type Click the type of network component you want to install pe ID MEL Protocol is a language a computer uses Computers must use the same protocol ta communicate 5 Click on component type Protocol and click on the Add button The Select Network Proto col dialog box appears 6 Click on Microsoft and TCP IP as shown below Select Network Protocol Click the Network Protocol that you want to install then click OF IE you have X an installation disk for this device click Have Disk Manufacturers Network Protocols IPS Pe compatible Protocal Microsoft 32 bit DLE Mic
280. striction against copying or modifying the SOFTWARE PRODUCT The SOFTWARE PRODUCT is copyrighted by BOSCH SECURITY SYSTEMS or third parties Except as expressly permitted in this agreement you may not copy or otherwise reproduce the SOFTWARE PRODUCT In no event does the limited copying or reproduction permitted under this agreement include the right to de compile reverse engineering disassemble modify or electronically transfer the SOFTWARE PRODUCT or to translate the SOFT WARE PRODUCT into another computer language Separation of Components The SOFTWARE PRODUCT is licensed as a single product Its component parts may not be separated for use on more than one Server Rental You may not rent or lease the SOFTWARE PRODUCT Termination Without prejudice to any other rights BOSCH SECURITY SYSTEMS may ter minate this EULA if you fail to comply with the terms and conditions of this EULA In such event you must destroy all copies of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT and all of its component parts COPYRIGHT All title and copyrights in and to the SOFTWARE PRODUCT including but not limited to any images photographs animations video audio music text and applets incorporated into the SOFTWARE PRODUCT the accompanying printed mate rials and any copies of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT are owned by BOSCH SECURITY SYS TEMS or its suppliers The SOFTWARE PRODUCT is protected by the copyright laws and international treaty provisions You may not copy printed
281. struction Message MAX 255 characters This is a high priority alarm from R amp b Check the status of the E physical door and call Ehe police if intrusion is detected 3 Enter a name for the Alarm Instruction Message in the Description textbox 4 The Instruction Message textbox provides a space for you to enter up to 255 characters You could enter the instruction that you want to pop up to the screen when the user acknowledges the alarm Please refer to the previous section How to Setup Alarm Event Condition for the assignment of Alarm Instruction Message to Alarm Event Condition 5 To complete the setup click on U to save the settings Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 106 en Report Generation ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 13 Report Generation Report Generation feature allows us to generate report for activities which have occurred It has a filtering mechanism to find and sort out activities based on the criteria set by the user The criteria that could be defined are Date Time Devices Card Holders Events Pi oam By combining the correct combination the user could generate a detail and specific report The criteria can also be saved for further use NOTICE 1 The more criteria is defined the more accurate and precise is the report However an incorrect mix of criteria will result in not finding the information you need Please refer to Appendix A Selecting Events Dev
282. sy Master Controller 3 Enter the mobile numbers in the appropriate field 4 Click on the 999 button Message field The Message field makes up the body text while the Event is to appear in the subject field of the dispatched email To edit the Message field 1 Click on the Message or the Description text to proceed Message Message 1 Description Message from Central Office El 2 E3C 2 Highlight the default text and enter a Description for the Message 3 Enter the new message limiting to 127 characters including punctuation 4 Click on the 999 button 5 Click on the button to return Devices This web page allows user to configure the first Devices of the three items for the AND oper ation To edit the Email Configuration Devices 1 Click on the Device link or the button from the Sent To web page a Send Ta e Message T Cardholders E Events e ateness Report Devices Group 1 Description System Admin Group 1 v All readers inputs amp output points All readers only All input points only C rc C All output points only Selected devices only r Omit these selected devices only Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Panels Admin en 171 2 Select the desired radio button and click on the button If selection is made on either Selected Devices Only or Omit these Selected Devices Only a window and a pull down list ap
283. sy Master is a revolutionary invention that takes advantage of the web technology age by changing the way an electronic access control system is implemented The conventional way of implementing a typical access control system requires installation of application programs that are used to remote control and monitor a controller in the system Furthermore application programs that are designed for a specific operating system have to be re developed before it can run on another operating system Access Easy Master uniquely combines the features of Web technologies and Access Control functionality into one complete unit Such powerful combination provides a highly cost effec tive solution which truly offers to user the simplicity and ease of use associated with the pop ular Web interface while incorporating a rich suite of sophisticated security features essential for small to medium sized businesses The design of Access Easy Master adopts the common desktop metaphor for all Windows applications for consistency and ease of use The same look and feel such as buttons and check boxes that you have experienced in other Windows applications will be seen in Access Easy Master The unique feature in Access Easy Master is all the Access Easy Controller can be centrally administered from a single Access Easy Master Features of Access Easy Master P Cross operating platform system interoperability Whether it is a PC Mac or Unix machine Access
284. t Input Point Configuration To activate Input Point Configuration To Select 2 State Non Supervised 2 State Supervised or 4 State Supervised Email SMS Configuration Send To Message field Devices Cardholders Events Lateness Report Email Server Settings SMS Server Settings Reset APB How To Reset APB by Card Number wrt Reader All Readers How to reset APB based on Name wrt Reader All Readers How to reset APB by All Card numbers wrt Reader All Readers How to Configure the Access Easy Master IP Address For PC Users Changing the PC s IP address Settings to be made to the Web browser Changing the IP address of Access Easy Master For Macintosh Users Changing the Macintosh s IP address Settings to be made to the Web browser Accessing and Understanding Access Easy for Master Main Menu Connecting to Access Easy for Master Logging onto Access Easy for Master Logging onto Access Easy for Master Logging off from Access Easy for Master Understanding the Home Page Main Menu Groups Manual Control Panel Admin Panel Maintenance Logout Navigating Through Access Easy for Master page Door Control To activate Door Control To control the Doors manually Software Manual ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 155 156 156 157 158 162 163 165 166 166 167 168 169 170 170 171 172 173 176 177 180 180 181 181 182 182 182 186 189 190 190 191 194 194 194 195 195 196 197 197 197 197 1
285. t card pin number is set at 1234000 Card Disabled O indicates that user card is NOT disabled for access 1 indicates user card is disabled from all access to the system permanently Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 56 en Card Assignment ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 6 3 2 How to Import the Card Database Sometimes user may have a lot of changes to make or new cards to add before importing the card database into the system 1 To import card database into the system select a file to be imported by clicking on the _ browse button The Choose File dialogue box will appear for the user to choose the file to be imported as shown below Lhaoose hle ccc T I7 FT My Computer Ay a Dscn1547 jpg My Documents 1 MVdbbackup exe eal Network Neighborhood CoderZ exe 5 Lotus Notes VI cutepiinter exe ix Map ditor exe F Cygan Fl NS Setup exe UE ow32enen723 ex 2 Select the file in CSV format to be imported to the system and click the Open button 3 The file name and directory will appear in the space provided beside Select a CSV File as shown below Card Assignment _ um Search By Card Batch Cards fh Search By Mame a Add Card s Select 4 CSV File C WINDOWS Desk topsc Browse Import Export 4 Click on the _Import_ button to import the card database into the system The box as shown below will appear A Import All the cards Web
286. t is currently Disarmed the Manual Action will shows Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Disarm Now button is click Arm Mow Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Input Control en 207 20 1 2 To control Arm Disarm the Alarm Zone 1 Click on the appropriate Alarm Zone link to display the list of Input Points configured to ep Alarm Zone 3 that zone For example click on the link will only list those Input Points configured for Alarm Zone 3 as shown below Manual Contral Input Control Q coor Control Q sutput control Reset ape view Activity E 1 16 r 17 32 Alarm zone 1 e Alarm Zone 2 Alarm Zone 3 F Alarm Zone d 3 R amp D Disarmed High Alarm Zone 3 31 Input Point 31 Disarmed High Alarm Zone 3 32 Input Point 32 Disarmed High Alarm Zone 3 E 2 Click on the button to arm the Input Points within the Alarm Zone The web page will refresh to reflect the new status and the button changes to ii clicking on it will Disarm all the Input Points within the Alarm Zone Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 208 en Output Control 21 Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Output Control The Output Control is one of the menu items of the Manual Control Group It allows user to check the status of all the Output Points and send a command to turn On Off the points manually However if the Output Point
287. t of a combination of alarms devices and Alarm Instruction Message An Alarm Event allows you to customize the Alarm Instruction Message that will be displayed when the user acknowledges an alarm from the View Activity Referring back to the previous example where you would like the user to see an instruction message for the Door Forced Open Alarm and Invalid Card Alarm in R amp D Dept and a different instruction message for the Door Forced Open Alarm and Invalid Card Alarm in Production Dept You will need to configure 2 different Alarm Events Let s use this example as we guide you through the configuration 1 From the Alarm Event Setup screen click on the Alarm Event Condition Setup hyperlink The Alarm Event Condition Setup screen will appear as shown below Alarm Priority Setup zr E mem L izg lis 256 Description Er Mone Undefined Event 2 Hone Undefined Event 3 None Undefined Event 4 None Undefined Event 5 Hane n None Undefined Event 7 Hone Undefined Event 10 Undefined Event 11 undefined Event 12 Click on the ar Undetined Event 14 Hone fles ists iE IS rmm Undefined Event 15 Mone Description text Mone i Undefined Ewent 17 None to configure Undefined Event 18 Mone Undefined Event 1535 Hone Undefined Event 20 Hone Undefined Event 21 None Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 102 en Server Setup Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 ALLPLEX
288. t to Every visit to the page as shown in the following diagram If it is not click on the corresponding radio button This step is necessary in order for the view in View Activity to be updated periodically Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller How to Configure the Access Easy Master IP Address en 187 Settings N 3 Click on the OK button to exit to previous dialog box 4 f your office network does not have a Proxy Server for accessing Internet you could skip the following steps else please read on Internet Options ETT ES Seething We ven dalle Gohine cian Wal Whenever 4 hennak Gone chin fs hob present LJ PIS 2 aial Iris dehawit connectar Eurentdetaulte Hane p SETTE Onin SUsten Secu TII TESTS e behae ET LECT Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 188 en How to Configure the Access Easy Master IP Address ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 5 Under the Connections tab click on the LAN Settings button The LAN Settings dialog box appears Check on Bypass proxy Server for local addresses box if the Access Easy Master exists on the LAN Local Area Network LAH Settings El ES Automatic configuration Automatic configuration may override manual settings To ensure the use of manual settings disable automatic configuration Use automatic configuration script Addiess Proxy server
289. tabase Restore typically takes about 1 2 minutes During this period it is advisable not to change other system parameters However the Access Easy Master and the Access Easy Con troller s will not be affected by the action All operations such as door access and alarm mon itoring will still operate as usual It is recommended that you perform a syncronisation of the Access Easy Master database to Access Easy Controller after you restore the database Please refer to Chapter 9 How to add Access Easy Controller on the syncronsation operation Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Reboot Shutdown and Logout en 121 15 Reboot Shutdown and Logout 15 1 Reboot Function The Reboot function allows user to reboot the server after upgrading to the system software is completed or in order to allow changes made to take effect especially changes made to Net work Setting Panel s IP Address CAUTION During a Reboot it is important that the Database Backup function is carried out before pro ceeding to reboot the Access Easy Master Reboot can be activated only from the Left Pane menu item 1 From any menu item page click on the Reboot link from the Left Pane The following dia log box appears for confirmation Microsoft Internet Explorer 2 Do you really want to restart the Server Cancel 2 Click on the OK button to proceed 3 It takes a few minutes for the process to compl
290. td ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Holidays en 75 10 Holidays Holidays are holidays that are applicable to all the Access Easy Controllers managed by the Access Easy Master Holidays have to be set up only if the system operation behaviour is required to be different during holidays Some samples of how the parameters affect the sys tem operation behaviour are gt The Controller unlocks a specific door during certain working hours of the day However during a holiday the door will remain locked the whole day gt A cardholder is allowed access to certain areas during working hours However during a holiday the cardholder is not allowed access By providing a centralized configuration of holidays the Server Administrator can just config ure Holidays in the Access Easy Master and it will synchronize with all the Access Easy Con trollers automatically This section covers the step by step guide to set up Holidays parameters Holidays set up consist of 64 Holidays selection of which 32 are assigned to Regular Holiday dates and the other 32 assigned to Special Holiday dates There is no difference between the operational behaviour of both types For simplicity you may treat the Special Holiday set up for use during the eve of a holiday Each Holiday has the feature nclude year in processing If it is set to No the Controller will not consider the Year during a date check This is very useful if the holiday date fal
291. te delay as compared to the Schedule 2 setting The reason is that Access Easy Controller takes 17 30 59hrs as a valid End time for 1730hrs NOTICE Before you configure any Input Point s please ensure that the Alarm Monitoring Device with the EOL resistor is in place with the necessary logic inversion on the Input Point Configuration web page 1 To Setup the Input Point select the target Access Easy Controller and click on the Input Setup hyperlink The following screen will appear i Motion Detector 1 Alarm Zone 1 Ion E Alarm Zone 1 3 Motion De Alarm zone 2 4 Motion Detector 4 Alarm Zone 2 5 Motion iE Mot Assigned 6 ndefined Input Point 6 Mot Assigned Z f Z Not Assigned 8 ndefin n Fifi Mot Assigned 3 ndefin n Poin Mot Assigned 10 ndefined In Point Mot Assigned ll ndefined Input Point 1 Mot Assigned 12 fined Input Point 1 Not Assigned 13 ndefin nput Point Mot Assigned i4 ndefin n Pol 4 Not Assign 15 Undefined Input Point 15 Not Assigned 16 Undefined Input Point 16 Not Assigned liz ndefin nput Point 17 Mot Assigned 18 Undefined Input Point 18 Mot Assigned 19 ndefined In Point Mot Assigned 20 Undefined Input Point 20 Mot Assigned Zl Undefined Input Point 21 i i zz ndefin n Paint 2 ot Assign 2 Click on the nput Description or Zone text to proceed A screen as shown below appears Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Panels Admin en 147
292. ted Soft APB or Access Granted Soft APB will be shown on his her next exit or entry respectively The administrator needs to Reset APB in order to clear the above transaction Refer to the Chapter on Reset APB for detail To select this mode select Activate Soft APB The Entry Zone and Exit Zone must be selected for this mode to work properly Activate Full APB When this mode is selected user must first enter using the Entry Reader in order to exit from the corresponding Exit Reader If cardholder violates this access will be denied The adminis trator needs to Reset APB before the cardholder can have access again Refer to the Chapter on Reset APB for detail To select this mode select Activate Full APB The Entry Zone and Exit Zone must be selected for this mode to work properly The main difference between the Soft and Full APB is that for Soft APB the user is allowed to exit the controlled area via the Exit Reader even if he she entered the controlled area previ ously by following another person Full APB does not allow that Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 142 en Panels Admin Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Understanding the APB Zone APB Zone is applicable to Soft APB and the Full APB mode Access Easy Controller is able to support up to 254 Soft APB Entry Zones 254 Soft APB Exit Zone 254 Full APB Entry Zone and 254 Full APB Exit Zone APE Zone 3
293. ter Controller APPENDIX D Email SMS Configuration Table en 251 Door Locked Door Unlocked Door Momentarily Unlocked Selected Omit Selected Omit Output Cardholders Selected Omit Readers Selected Omit Input FE EEG All Readers Inputs and Output Point All Output Points Te All Readers x lt BE All Input Points Duration On Duration Off Dwsimor 5 Tear J J p gt Turned O By sme x mew ep ep LL E Gekow xf TIE LE Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 252 en APPENDIX E Setting up a Timeserver ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 32 APPENDIX E Setting up a Timeserver This Appendix provides information on how to set up a timeserver on windows 2000 XP Pro PC The following section uses Windows 2000 and XP Pro to illustrate how the timeserver is set up 32 1 For Windows 2000 1 Click Statt start button and select Run button 2 Type regedit in the window Hun Ei x Type Ehe name of a program Folder document ar Internet resource and Windows will open it For you Open Cancel Browse 3 Select HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SYSTEM CURRENTCONTROLSET SERVICES WS32TIME PARAMETERS MT UENIT Regery Edt ew Fawcnbes Heb 05 7 mgbsewm o sxWew Type Data Ey semi 35 beladi REG Sz peale reat sel sm hi Bl cane REG DWORD DaDOCCODC 1 E E gnc Ab Panad REG SZ B paciats iow eres ab pe REG_SZ MSDS SaEwenl mHE susaudin
294. ternatively click on the File and select Print 5 To return to the Card Readers first web page click on the Return To Card Readers ink Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Panels Admin en 145 16 4 Input Setup The Access Easy Controller has 32 user programmable Input Points that will be used for Alarm Monitoring purposes The addresses for these Input Points range from 33 to 64 and are avail able on the I O Card Each card provides up to eight Input Points These Input Points can be assigned into a Group called an Alarm Zone or as an Individual Both types provide the same function The only difference is the way each is being armed dis armed Access Easy Controller allows user to configure up to four Alarm Zones An Alarm Zone see NOTICE 2 below can be armed disarmed by the following methods gt Manually by user via a dedicated Arm Disarm Reader or gt Manually by user via the web page Input Control or gt System control based on Schedule Intervals An Individual Input Point can be armed disarmed only by Schedule intervals or manually by user via the web page To arm disarm an Input Point via the web page go to Manual Control Input Control All Input Points Group or Individual can be configured to trigger 1 to 4 Output Points of the I O Card for the purpose of status indication The Outputs are labelled as Alarm Status Turns ON during
295. the standard AEC Priority Format which have been pre assigned to Format 1 and 16 respec tively Card Format up to a maximum of 64 Bit and up to 8 Parity Format is configurable Click on Card Format from the menu item list and you will see a screen as shown below Panel Admin Panel Setup Metwork Settings Input Point Configuration e Set Date amp Time Auto Logout Timer exl Audit Lag l Default Settings en Card Format be Company Protile eri Email sMs Configuration BOSICH ADC Proprietary Format Standard 76 bit Card Format Standard 34 bit Card Format Undefined Card Format 4 Undefined Card Format 5 Undefined Card Format 6 Undefined Card Format 7 Undefined Card Format 8 Undefined Card Format 9 Undefined Card Format 10 Undefined Card Format 11 Undefined Card Format 1z Undefined Card Format 13 Undefined Card Format 14 Undefined Card Format 15 AEC Priority Format jH j jH E en E S IS IE E re reo rd pen te re 12 ra ie Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Server Setup en 87 12 3 1 How to Configure New Card Format 1 Click on the Format or Description text of any Undefined Card Format to proceed A screen as shown below appears Format x 3 Description Undefined Card Format 3 Card Encoded Format Parity Format 1 Parity Format 2 UA zr A gt m me Di T Legend Porp Parity bit Fort Facility bit ore Card Num
296. the PC s IP address you will need to configure some settings on the Web browser that you intended to use to view the pages on the Access Easy Master Access Easy Master supports most of the popular Web browsers such as IE5 5 Netscape4 etc Depending on the Web browser that your PC is installed with the following procedures will different but the settings required are common to most Web browsers Ask your network administrator for advice if you are unsure of where to configure these settings The following procedure is using IE5 5 as an example 1 From the Windows Control Panel click on the Intemet Options icon The Internet Options dialog box appears Internet Properties General Security Content Connection Program Advanced Home page A Tou can change which page to use for your home page Address nip basch caorm Use Defaut Use Blank 7 X Pages pou view on the Intemet are shored in a special folder for quick viewing later Delete Files Settings Temporary Internet files Histo ja The History folder contara links to pages you ve visited for quick access to recently viewed pages Days to keen pages in history Ei Clear History Colors Forts Languages Accessibilty Cancel Ame 2 Under the Temporary Internet files heading click on the Settings button to go into the next dialog box Confirm that the Check for newer versions of stored pages is se
297. the report if the check box for Events is not selected Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 13 2 Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Report Generation en 113 16 Select the relevant events from the pull down list Click on the events such as Door Forced Open to add them to the Selected List of Events Activity Report Generation m Load Criteria Go Audit d n Events Available Events Available Events Convertor Present Door closed Door Access Enabled Door Access Disabled Door Locked Door Unlocked Door Momentarily Unlocked Door Locked by Schedule Door Unlock by Schedule Convertor Communication Failed ied 17 To start generating the report click The following is a sample of the report gener ated Saye as CSV file Bosch Security Systems Pte Ltd JEC Jalan Peninpin Singapore 677180 Activities Report Thursday 26 Joy 200d 21 29 33 Bate 26 Aug 200d 27 Aug 200d Time 17 30 00 08 30 00 Date Location Panel Description Time Name Card Activity z6 Aug 2004 Accounts Dept Door Central Office el u18 20 eee sx Door Forced Open Page 1 of 1 Save as CSV file NOTICE The report can be saved in a CSV format This format is basically a text file in which the data are separated by a comma To save in CSV format click on the Save as CSV file and a dia logue box will appear for you to download the file to your loc
298. their consequences The information on this document is subject to change without notice Access Easy Master Controller is a trademark of Bosch Security Systems Other product and company names mentioned herein may be the trademarks of their respec tive owner End User License Agreement for Access Easy Master Controller software BOSCH SECURITY SYSTEMS SOFIWARE PRODUCTS Server Software Access Easy Master Controller Software BOSCH SECURITY SYSTEMS HARDWARE PRODUCTS Access Easy Master Controller and all input output modules IMPORTANT READ CAREFULLY This End User License Agreement EULA is a legal agree ment between you either an individual or a single entity and BOSCH SECURITY SYSTEMS for the BOSCH SECURITY SYSTEMS SOFTWARE PRODUCT which you acquired and any of the HARDWARE PRODUCT s identified above The SOFTWARE PRODUCT includes computer software the associate media any printed materials and any online or electronic documentation By installing copying or otherwise using the SOFTWARE PRODUCT you agree to be bound by the terms of this EULA If you do not agree to the terms of this EULA BOSCH SECURITY SYSTEMS or its resellers are unwilling to license the SOFTWARE PRODUCT to you In such event you may not use or copy the SOFT WARE PRODUCT and you should promptly contact BOSCH SECURITY SYSTEMS or its distrib utors for instructions on return of the unused product for a refund SOFTWARE PRODUCT LICENSE
299. tion Message Setup hyper link The Alarm Instruction Message Setup screen will appear as shown below Network Settings view Activity Setting Default Settings to Logout Timer E Company Profile Housekeeping Alarm Priority Setup Alarm Event Condition Satup Alarm Instruction Message Setup 1 128 lz 3 256 Description l Alarm Instruction for R amp D 2 Undefined Alarm Instruction z a Undefined Alarm instruction 4 6 Undefined Alarm Instruction amp cun Click on the Alarm 2 Undefined Alarm Instruction 2 i Lindefined Alarm instruction 10 Instruction Message or li ved Alarr ran WIE Y 12 Undefined Alarm Instruction 12 ihe Description text of 13 Undefined Alarm T dian any of these links to i Undefined Alarm Instruction 14 15 Undefined Alar san setup the alarm i Undefined Alarm Instruction 16 message 7 ndehned Alar Auction 17 18 Undefined Alarm Instruction 18 i2 ndehned Alarm In ian 19 20 Undefined Alarm Instruction 20 21 Undefined Alarm Instruction 21 2 Click on any of the Undefined Alarm Instruction to configure an Alarm Instruction Mes sage The following screen will appear e Sa Default Settings l e Ho jzekeeping Card Format Set Date amp Time Alarm Event Setup Alarm Priority Satup Alamo Event Condition Setup Alarm instruction Message Setup Alarm Instruction Message 1 sibel ih Description Alarm Instruction for Rad In
300. tion on To set the Scheduling Options below For example The Start and End time for Interval 1 of Schedule settings is set to O830hrs and 1730hrs respectively In this period the door will be unlocked between 0830 to 1731 hrs The drawing below provides a pictorial representation of the function Qe hrs 1r731hrz a i Door Status oor BS ocked 5 ON CON OON DONO CC UN La NOU NY Door Unlocked Door FE Notice that the Door is locked only at 1731hrs instead of 1730hrs The reason is that Access Easy Controller takes 17 30 59hrs as a valid End time for 1730hrs Schedules and Holidays will be used to unlock this door When this mode is selected during a Holiday the Cardholder will be allowed to access this Reader during the specific period as defined in Schedule intervals setting for holiday To set the scheduling options refer to the section on To set the Scheduling Options below To set the Scheduling Options For Schedules will be used to unlock this door and Schedules and Holidays will be used to unlock this door 1 To assign the Scheduling Options click on the desired radio button To de select that point click on other radio buttons By default it is set at Schedules will not be used to unlock this door 2 Ifthe selection is made on either Schedules will be used to unlock this door or Schedules and Holidays will be used to unlock this door please proceed to step 3 to select the Schedule 3 Select the desir
301. tware Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller How to Configure the Access Easy Master IP Address en 189 17 1 3 Changing the IP address of Access Easy Master To get connected to Access Easy Master run your web browser program and key in the Access Easy Master default URL address followed by the enter key Please refer to the following screen shot which shows a web browser in this case IE6 is shown with the URL of Access Easy Master A about blank Microsoft Internet Explorer Ele Edt View Favorites Tools Help Address 12820220 The User Login dialog box appears User Login User ID CO Password Version 0 0 11 The default user id is iuser1 and the default password is 8088 The default user id is the super user id The super user rights are assigned to the system administrator and he has full access rights over Access Easy Master Enter the default user id and password Now you can login to the Access Easy Master After getting connected to Access Easy Master you can change the IP address of the Access Easy Master from default to the actual IP you intend to use for the Server The View Activity page will be the first screen that the user sees after a successful login To change the IP address of your Access Easy Master click on Server Setup hyperlink under System Admin menu in the Left Pane By default you will be led to the Network Settings web page Refer to scree
302. u finish your session with Access Easy for Master or need to be away from the com puter it is recommended to log off from the Access Easy for Master To log off click on the Logout link Click on the appropriate button to proceed Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 196 en Accessing and Understanding Access Easy for Master Main Menu ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 18 3 Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Understanding the Home Page Main Menu Groups The Home Page gives an overview of the main functional features that the Access Easy for Mas ter supports and does not contain any parameters setting or data For the user convenience the icon buttons in line to the main menu group is linked to the page of the first menu item in the group Once in the menu item page the Home page icon button is added to the bottom of the list after the Logout button This is good for security reason Should a user is suddenly disrupted while in a middle of setting the Access Easy for Master parameters for example to answer a phone call he or she can click the Home button to exit the setting without having to click a few times on the Back button This will prevent prying eyes from looking at the setting The screen capture shown below shows the Home page Activity Card Database Card Access Admin Icon buttons far each ip Main Menu grau individual menu items Seen Only minimal features are available to Access Easy fo
303. u item page click on Panel Setup link E Panel Admin f Panel Setup 2 Network Settings input Point Configuration 2 Set Date amp Time e Auto Logout Timer e Audit Laq ew Default Settings Re Card Format e Company Profile n2 Emai SMS Configuration e Email Server Settings vial In IP Settings sEnc Settings e sms Server Settings 2angl s IP Address 172 1 amp 6 10 85 anel s IP Netmask 255 1 255 255 l Janel s Gateway 172 l6 10 1 Remote PC Address IP Address PC Name 1 172 15 lU 1U remotehozti 2 123 2 142 remotehost 3 129 2 Jd 43 remotehost 3 Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 216 en Panel Setup 23 2 23 2 1 Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Network Setting This configuration allows user to configure the Panel s IP Netmask and Gateway Address Each Access Easy Controller comes with 2 LAN ports they are labelled as LAN1 and LAN2 These LAN ports are physically individual ports that have its own IP address LAN 1 is connected to the network where the Access Easy Controller are accessed by other workstations this is usually the office network LAN2 is cater for further expansion End User PC End User PC Pecess Easy Controller LAM 1 In addition user can define 3 Remote PC Addresses for ftp purposes and the address of the email server To Configure LAN 1 Network Setting 1 Click on the Networ
304. umber Entry operation To edit the Keypad Timeout delete the default number and enter the new timeout value It should range from O 255 The factory default is 10 seconds Enable Reader Lockout When this mode is selected there is a restriction on the number of times a user with invalid access can present his card at the Reader 1 Check on the Enable Reader Lockout and click on the button A screen as shown below appears Reader X 1 Description Main Entrance Reader Function Go Settings PIN Code Settings Anti Passback Qual Card APB Settings Configuration E Turn off the reader Enable Keypad Only Operation m On Holidays follow holiday schedules to work in conjunction with Card Functionality Keypad Timeout 0 255 10 seconds v Enable reader lockaut Number of illegal attempts prior to lockout 0 255 3 Duration between illegal attempts 0 255 10 seconds Lockout duration 0 255 3 U seconds List of selected illegal events ta trigger lockout m E Select an illegal event 2 Choose the events that you would like to lock the users out by selecting from Select an illegal event and click on the button 3 The illegal events will appear on the List of selected illegal events to trigger lockout Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 132 en Panels Admin ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 4 To remove the illegal event from the List of selected illegal eve
305. ur of the Entry Reader such as Door Open Timer and Door Strike Timer If the Entry Reader for this Exit Reader is also a Arm Disarm Reader user can also arm disarm the same Alarm Zone at the Exit Reader as it now has the operational behaviour of the Entry Reader Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Panels Admin en 129 NOTICE Once a Reader is configured as an Exit Reader the Reader will only be accessible to Reader Functions The rest of the configuration such as Reader Options I O Settings PIN Code Set tings Anti Passback APB Settings and Dual Card Configuration will not be available until it is changed to an Entry Reader or an Entry and Arm Disarm Reader Entry and Arm Disarm Reader When this mode is selected this Reader will have all the functions of an Entry Reader and it can be used for Arming and Disarming a specific Alarm Zone i e this Reader can be used for door access control and it can also be used to perform Alarm Zone Arm Disarm function To arm an Alarm Zone using the same access Reader card holder with the Arm Disarm control just has to press the 0 key on the Keypad before presenting his card During an Arm state all valid access card will be disabled Only a Arm Disarm card Card must be checked at Card holder is able to Arm Disarm under Card Assignment can disarm the Alarm Zone and enable the door back to normal card access operation Dur
306. ut Relay assigned here is the same one that is listed at the Output Setup By setting the Duration to a value other than O at the Output Setup will cause the Alarm status Output Relay to turn on for the configured duration only Leaving it as O will cause the Output Relay to remain on till the Alarm Zone is disarmed or the Input Point has restored to normal condition Please refer to the section on Output Setup below for more details Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Select the Alarm Zone to which this Input Point is to group with from the list If you do not wish to assign it to Alarm Zone just select Not Assigned However it must at least be assigned to a Schedule for this configuration to function Select the Schedule from the list If you do not wish to assign it to a Schedule just leave it as Undefined However it must at least be assigned to an Alarm Zone for this configura tion to function This field is disabled if this is the second or subsequent Input Point of an Alarm Zone Select the appropriate Output Point for the various Status Outputs from the list By default these Outputs are Not Assigned Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 148 en Panels Admin ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller NOTICE The Output Points listed assigned here are the same as those listed at the Output Setup By setting the Duration to a value other than O at the Output Setup will cause the Status Output Relays to turn on for the configured duration Le
307. ve is configured in Card Readers setting Please refer to Card Readers for details Reader 5 is configured as Exit Reader for the Production Department Its operational behav iour will follow that of the Entry Reader and thus no Schedule can be configured 2 Delete the default text and enter the new Description Click on the appropriate check boxes to indicate a tick mark for Reader s to be assigned to this Access Group 4 Select the appropriate Schedule from the list for each selected Reader NOTICE The above example shows that Staff from Production Department Team A can have 24 hours access to the Main Entrance and access to their own department according to their work shift In addition other than the normal work hours they are not allowed to come in by the Side Entrance as its Schedule is not 24 hours access 5 If you have completed the settings for the first 8 Readers proceed to the next 8 Readers only if required by clicking on the gt button Repeat steps 3 and 4 6 To confirm the setting click on WL button Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 126 en Panels Admin 16 2 2 Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller How to Generate a Print Preview of the Access Groups Report Once you have completed configuring the required Access Groups a hardcopy can be printed out To print any one or all Access Groups Report select from the list box 1 From the first web pa
308. ve or All Transactions Using Java Applet technique all the activities and status on the Manual Control pages Door Control Input Control and Output Control will be automatically updated in real time Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 18 en Logging In And Understanding Access Easy Master Main Menu ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller 3 2 2 3 2 3 3 2 4 Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Manual Control Manual Control allows the user to control the door input points and output points manually by having priority over the control set by the system The sub menu items of Manual Control are Door Control Input Control and Output Control Door Control Door Control allows the user to check the status of all the doors and send a command to either momentarily unlock or permanently unlock lock the door without having to be at the door location Input Control Input Control allows the user to check the status of all the input points assigned to specific alarm zones and to send a command to arm disarm the zone manually Output Control Output Control allows the user to check the status of all the output points and send a com mand to turn on off the points manually Card Database Card Database allows the user to administer the card details functionality and the access lev els of the card The sub menu items of Card Database are Card Assignment and Access Levels Card Assignment Card Assignment allow
309. vel Please select an Access Level Details 01 xDODOODODDPE3DE 7U 26 Lisk af scanned ecards Add Options Copy Fram Global Card x Facility Code E Card Format BOSCH amp D c Proprietary Format v Automatically replace existing card s with default reference card information X 4 The administrator can now assign any Card Name and Access Level to the card In the screen below the Card is assigned as 1208 the Name of the cardholder as Julia Chua and the Access Level as Full Access Refer to Chapter 7 Access Levels for more details NOTICE If you have a number of cards to enrol for example 20 cards You can select Auto Assignment feature which will automatically increment the Card number after you enrol the first card It is recommended that the administrator assigns a number to the card of unknown wiegand format beforehand and sticks a label on the card so that it is easier to refer to the card num ber during the card enrolment process Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Card Assignment en 59 6 Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd cards Enrollment Reader Card 1208 LlAuta Assignment Name Julia Chua Access Level Full Accezs w Details 01 OWODODDDDDOZE SDE 70 26 List of scanned cards Add Options Copy From Global Card Facility Code 1 Card Format BOZCH A amp DC Proprietary Format Automatically replace existing card s
310. w settings will be synchronized to the Panels As shown below 2 Panels named Central Office and Gateway Office are currently setup to the Access Easy Master Panels Admin Central Off ice Contra Office To configure any item Access Groups Card Readers Input Setup Output Setup Advance I O Setup Input Point Configuration Email SMS Configuration or Reset APB of a particular Access Easy Controller you will need to first select the Panel description from the pull down list as shown above After selecting the Panel to administrate you could click on any hyperlink to the items that you want to configure Panels Admin Central Office Click an any of these links to go ta the selected Access Easy Controller Once you click on any of the hyperlink as described above the page showing the selected function will appear for the selected Panel Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 124 en Panels Admin 16 2 Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller How to Setup Access Groups An Access Group defines a list of Readers within certain authorised time periods pre defined Schedule that the cardholders can access This means that only within this Schedule card holders with this access group can access this Reader There are 254 programmable Access Groups In addition there are two more unique Access Groups They are the Full Access group that allows cardholders to access a
311. we only want those Door Forced Open Alarm and Invalid Card Alarm to display the alarm instruction message 11 If Selected Alarms is chosen you will need to select the type of alarms from the pull down list box The Available Alarms list box contains all the different types of alarms that are available in the entire system vailable Alarms Convertor Communication Failed Request To Exit Input Fault Opened Request To Exit Input Fault Shorted Door Contact Input Fault Opened Door Contact Input Fault Shorted Access Denied Card Disabled Access Denied access Denied Passback Exit Denied Passback Invalid Schedule Invalid Card Access Denied Wrong Pin Access Denied Time APH Invalid Second Card Read Invalid Start Date Invalid End Date Invalid First Card Read Reader Lockout Duress Door Forced Open Door Held Available Alarms ka Choose the desired alarms to be added to the Selected list of Alarms by clicking on the description of the alarm For the example Door Forced Open and Invalid Card are selected 12 Lastly click on O to save the settings Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Server Setup en 105 12 9 3 Alarm Instruction Message setup This part of the setting allows you to define up to 255 different Alarm Instruction Message for the Alarm Event Conditions 1 From the Alarm Event Setup screen click on the Alarm Instruc
312. web browser and select View Refresh The Security Alert box will appear again Click Yes to proceed Access Easy Master 5 BOSCH rrr User Login eo Password Login Merrion 2 12962 This product is patent protected vigw patent list Robert Bosch GmbH reserves all righte even in the event of industrial property rights We rezarve all rights of disposal such as copying and passing on ta third parties 8 Enter your assigned User ID and Password Click on the Login button to login Upon successful login to the Access Easy Master the user will see the View Activity page in Alarm transactions It is the default page whenever the user logins to Access Easy Master NOTICE The default User ID is iuser1 and the default Password is 8088 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller The pages will have the main menu items on the Left Pane and the work area on the Right Activity Manual Control Card Database System Admin 172 16 10 932 Mit a doe kd rd d bor o RU Logging In And Understanding Access Easy Master Main Menu en Pee PPPS EEE EEE EEE EEE EEE EEE EEE EEE EEE SEE EEE EEE EEE EEE EEE EEE EE g Access Easy Master E BOSCH errr rr storm valid Restore all Time atendan i cation k Activity Description 1 23 Dec 2005 Reader 2 Access Denied Passback a Card Number i0 1
313. y events that will meet the criteria Cause the events for Alarm and Alarm Restored will never comes with a cardholder s ID and it will never happens on a reader Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 250 en APPENDIX D Email SMS Configuration Table ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Selected Omit Output All Cardholders x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt Selected Omit Cardholders Selected Omit Readers Selected Omit Input Y xe a c o ZA S s Qo vo 2 E lt 3 q c v E z _ mE NE NM Ea All Input Points All Output Points Panel Tamper Tamper Restored Panel AC Failure Power Restored Alarm Alarm Restored BE B Door Forced Open Door Held Open Door Closed Duress Access Denied Access Denied Passback Exit Denied Passback X Access Denied Timed APB Access Denied Wrong PIN Invalid Schedule Invalid Card Invalid start Date Invalid End Date Armed Disarmed EE Armed By schedule Disarmed By Schedule x B Bypassed Access Granted Exit Granted Access Granted Soft x lt X X X APB Exit Granted Soft APB PIN Changed Door Access Enabled X Door Access Disabled X Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Software Manual Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy Mas
314. y paid by you for the product ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller Table of Contents 2 1 2 2 2 9 3l 3 2 3 2 1 9 2 2 3 2 9 3 2 4 9142 9 3 3 4 1 4 1 1 4 1 2 5 1 Sud 5 1 2 9 1 2 5 2 9 2 1 5 2 2 9 3 oeM 6 6 1 6 1 1 6 2 6 2 1 6 2 2 6 2 3 6 3 6 3 1 6 3 2 6 3 3 6 3 4 Before You Begin Introduction to Access Easy Master Features of Access Easy Master Terms and Conventions In addition to these terms the following conventions are used Logging In And Understanding Access Easy Master Main Menu Logging Into Access Easy Master Main Menu Items Activity Manual Control Card Database System Admin Panels Admin Usage of the Buttons Activity View Activity How To View Activity How to Process Alarms Events Manual Control Door Control How to Unlock Reader Controlled Door How to Lock Reader Controlled Door How to Momentarily Unlock Reader Controlled Door Input Control How to Arm Disarm an Input Point How to Arm an Alarm Zone Output Control How to Turn On Off Output Points Card Assignment The Card Parameters Card Details Adding and Deleting Cards How to Add a New Card How to Add a Batch of Cards How to Delete a Batch of Cards How to Import and Export Card Database How to Export the Card Database How to Import the Card Database Cards Enrolment Operation Card Enrolment of Card with Unknown Wiegand Format Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Table of Conte
315. ys Off Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd Software Manual Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 162 en Panels Admin 16 6 8 Ver 1 0 1 2012 10 Up Down Counter This function enables the tracking of the number of card holder event and is able to trigger output or control based on the maximum configuration limit n Up Count Input Chatput gt 0 af a p Down Count Output Ma CFF Input Reset Maximum Limit XXXXX 0 to 85535 Pre load counter value X XXXX 0 to Software Manual ALLPLEX Access Easy Master Controller In Section 2 a leading edge from O to 1 is first detected at Input A From Section 1 we know that when someone presents his card at reader for door A door A will be unlocked Output A Low and the rest of the doors to be incapable of being unlocked Output High But before door A is locked back someone presents his card at door B He cannot unlock door B as it is incapable of being unlocked Output B High Both the above operations Interlock Operation and Mantrap can be easily configured by mon itoring the door strike and contact status The number of doors that can be configured for these operations is only limited by the number of I O and Reader available per controller Output O Set high when the counter is not zero and set low when the counter SO Output gt Max Set high when the counter is greater than or equal to the maximum ENNIO RN Robert Bosch SEA Pte Ltd ALLPLEX Access Easy

Operation Manual - Bosch Security Systems

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents